WO2019029548A1 - Synchronization signal transmission method and apparatus - Google Patents
Synchronization signal transmission method and apparatus Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2019029548A1 WO2019029548A1 PCT/CN2018/099298 CN2018099298W WO2019029548A1 WO 2019029548 A1 WO2019029548 A1 WO 2019029548A1 CN 2018099298 W CN2018099298 W CN 2018099298W WO 2019029548 A1 WO2019029548 A1 WO 2019029548A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- sequence
- sequences
- reference signal
- lfsr
- demodulation reference
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Ceased
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W56/00—Synchronisation arrangements
- H04W56/0005—Synchronisation arrangements synchronizing of arrival of multiple uplinks
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W56/00—Synchronisation arrangements
Definitions
- the present application relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a method for transmitting a synchronization signal, a network device, and a terminal device.
- LTE Long Term Evolution
- UE user equipment
- two downlink synchronization signals are defined, which are a Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS) and a Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS).
- PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
- SSS Secondary Synchronization Signal
- the UE After the UE completes the cell search process, the UE has obtained downlink synchronization with the cell. At this time, the UE needs to acquire the system information of the cell to know how the cell is configured, so as to access the cell and work correctly in the cell.
- the system information includes a Master Information Block (MIB) and a System Information Block (SIB).
- MIB Master Information Block
- SIB System Information Block
- the MIB is sent by the base station to the UE through a Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH).
- PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
- the synchronization signal and the PBCH occupy different time-frequency resources, respectively.
- NR radio access technology
- SS block Synchronization Signal Block
- the beam has a configurable mapping relationship with the SS block, for example, each beam in the multiple beams transmits a different SS block, or two beams can transmit the same SS block.
- PSS, SSS, and PBCH form an SS block by using Time Division Multiplexing (TDM).
- TDM Time Division Multiplexing
- each SS block includes Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbols for transmitting PSS, OFDM symbols for transmitting SSS, and OFDM symbols for transmitting PBCH.
- OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
- One or more SS blocks form a Synchronization Signal Burst (SS burst), and one or more SS bursts form a Synchronization Signal Burst set (SS burst set). Therefore, one SS burst set includes one or more SS blocks. In the case where a SS burst set contains multiple SS blocks, the communication system needs to add information indicating the ordering of an SS block in the associated SS burst set for practical requirements such as frame alignment.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a method for transmitting a synchronization signal, which is used to provide a scheme for a network device to send, to a terminal device, indication information indicating an order of an SS block in an associated SS burst set.
- a method of transmitting a synchronization signal comprising:
- the network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for indicating the ordering of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set, the synchronization signal block including a physical broadcast channel PBCH symbol;
- the network device generates two M sequences according to the linear feedback shift register LFSR, and the initial value of the LFSR is determined according to part of the information in the indication information;
- the network device adds cyclic shifts to the two M sequences, and generates a Gold sequence
- the network device intercepts a subsequence from the Gold sequence as a demodulation reference signal sequence, where the demodulation reference signal sequence is used to demodulate a signal transmitted in a time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping,
- the time-frequency resource includes a first resource and a second resource
- the network device transmits the demodulation reference signal sequence by using the second resource.
- the network device initializes the LFSR used to generate the M sequence according to the partial information in the indication information, so that the Gold sequence generated according to the M sequence and the solution intercepted from the Gold sequence are obtained.
- the tone reference signal sequence and the partial information are uniquely corresponding. In this way, part of the information is carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner, instead of transmitting the indication information through the PBCH in a manner of being displayed, thereby reducing the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH and saving the PBCH. Time-frequency resources.
- the size of the LFSR is 31, and the initial value of the LFSR is c init .
- c init 2 p * PCID + 2 q * SS idx +1, where PCID is the cell identifier, SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information, p is a natural number less than or equal to 20, and q is a natural number less than or equal to 27,
- Each of the two M sequences has a length of I, I is a natural number, and I has a value range of 31 ⁇ I ⁇ 2 31 -1.
- I is 3344
- N c is 3200
- G is 3344
- the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
- the network device divides the demodulation reference signal sequence into first subsequences and second subsequences of the same length;
- the network device maps the first subsequence and the second subsequence to different parts of the second resource respectively;
- the first subsequence and the second subsequence are transmitted by different portions of the second resource.
- a method of transmitting a synchronization signal including
- the terminal device obtains a set of candidate sequences, where the set of candidate sequences includes a plurality of candidate sequences, and the process of generating one of the plurality of candidate sequences includes: generating two M sequences according to the LFSR, The initial value of the LFSR is determined according to one of the value sets corresponding to the partial information in the indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the ordering of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set; M sequences are cyclically shifted and added to generate a Gold sequence; a subsequence is intercepted from the Gold sequence as a candidate sequence;
- the terminal device detects a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device
- the terminal device selects, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal;
- a network device including a transceiver and a processor, wherein
- the processor is configured to generate a synchronization signal block and use the indication information to determine the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set, where the synchronization signal block includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH symbol;
- the time-frequency resource includes a first resource and a second resource, where the first resource is a time-frequency resource used to transmit a primary information block MIB in a time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping, and the second resource is the PBCH a time-frequency resource other than the first resource in the time-frequency resource of the symbol mapping;
- the transceiver is configured to send, by using the first resource, the remaining information except the partial information in the indication information, and send the demodulation reference signal sequence by using the second resource.
- the size of the LFSR is 31, and the initial value of the LFSR is c init .
- c init 2 p * PCID + 2 q * SS idx +1, where PCID is the cell identifier, SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information, p is a natural number less than or equal to 20, and q is a natural number less than or equal to 27,
- Each of the two M sequences has a length of I, I is a natural number, and I has a value range of 31 ⁇ I ⁇ 2 31 -1.
- I is 3344
- N c is 3200
- G is 3344
- the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
- the processor is further configured to average the demodulated reference signal sequence into a first subsequence and a second subsequence of the same length; mapping the first subsequence and the second subsequence to the Describe the different parts of the second resource;
- the transceiver is configured to send the first subsequence and the second subsequence through different parts of the second resource.
- a terminal device including a transceiver and a processor, wherein
- the processor is configured to obtain a candidate sequence set, where the candidate sequence set includes multiple candidate sequences, and a process of generating one of the multiple candidate sequences includes: generating two according to the LFSR The M sequence, the initial value of the LFSR is determined according to one of the value sets corresponding to the partial information in the indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the ordering of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set; Performing cyclic shifting on the two M sequences to add a Gold sequence; and extracting a subsequence from the Gold sequence as a candidate sequence;
- the transceiver is configured to detect a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device
- the processor is further configured to select, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal;
- a method for transmitting a synchronization signal including:
- the network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining an order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set, the synchronization signal block including a physical broadcast channel PBCH symbol;
- the network device generates two M sequences according to the linear feedback shift register LFSR;
- the network device adds cyclic shifts to the two M sequences, and generates a Gold sequence
- the network device intercepts at least one subsequence from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence, and a starting position when the subsequence is intercepted is determined according to the partial information, the demodulation reference signal
- the sequence is configured to demodulate a signal transmitted in the time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping
- the time-frequency resource includes a first resource and a second resource
- the network device transmits the demodulation reference signal sequence by using the second resource.
- the network device In the method for generating a demodulation reference signal sequence provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device generates a longer Gold sequence according to a larger LFSR.
- the starting position of the truncated sub-sequence is determined according to part of the information in the indication information, such that the truncated demodulation reference signal sequence and the portion are Information is uniquely corresponding.
- part of the information is carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner, instead of transmitting the indication information through the PBCH in a manner of being displayed, thereby reducing the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH and saving the PBCH. Time-frequency resources.
- Each of the two M sequences has a length of I, I is a natural number, and I has a value range of 31 ⁇ I ⁇ 2 31 -1.
- the starting position when the subsequence is intercepted is denoted as k,
- SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information.
- I is 3344
- N c is 3200
- G is 3344
- the at least one subsequence is a subsequence
- n k,...,k+143.
- the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
- the network device divides the demodulation reference signal sequence into first subsequences and second subsequences of the same length;
- the network device maps the first subsequence and the second subsequence to different parts of the second resource respectively;
- the first subsequence and the second subsequence are transmitted by different portions of the second resource.
- Each of the two M sequences has a length of I, I is a natural number, and I has a value range of 31 ⁇ I ⁇ 2 31 -1.
- I is 3344
- N c is 3200
- G is 3344
- the at least one subsequence is two subsequences
- n k 1 , . . . , k 1 +71
- n k 2 ,..., k 2 +71.
- the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
- the network device maps the first subsequence and the second subsequence to different parts of the second resource respectively;
- the first subsequence and the second subsequence are transmitted by different portions of the second resource.
- a method of transmitting a synchronization signal including
- the terminal device obtains a set of candidate sequences, where the set of candidate sequences includes a plurality of candidate sequences, and a process of generating one of the plurality of candidate sequences includes: generating two M sequences according to the LFSR; The two M sequences are cyclically shifted and added to generate a Gold sequence; at least one subsequence is intercepted from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence, and the starting position of the subsequence is intercepted according to And determining, by the value of the value set corresponding to the partial information in the indication information, the indication information is used to indicate the ordering of the synchronization signal block in the pulse group of the synchronization signal to which the synchronization signal is located;
- the terminal device detects a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device
- the terminal device selects, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal;
- the terminal device determines, according to the selected candidate sequence, part of the information when the selected candidate sequence is generated to determine a starting position when the subsequence is intercepted.
- a network device including a transceiver and a processor, wherein
- the processor is configured to generate a synchronization signal block and the indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set, where the synchronization signal block includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH symbol;
- Extracting at least one subsequence from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence, the starting position when the subsequence is truncated is determined according to the partial information, and the demodulation reference signal sequence is used for Demodulating a signal transmitted in a time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping,
- the time-frequency resource includes a first resource and a second resource
- the transceiver is configured to send, by using the first resource, a primary information block MIB and remaining information of the indication information except the partial information; and sending, by using the second resource, the demodulation reference signal sequence .
- Each of the two M sequences has a length of I, I is a natural number, and I has a value range of 31 ⁇ I ⁇ 2 31 -1.
- the starting position when the subsequence is intercepted is denoted as k,
- SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information.
- I is 3344
- N c is 3200
- G is 3344
- the at least one subsequence is a subsequence
- n k,...,k+143.
- the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
- the processor is further configured to average the demodulated reference signal sequence into a first subsequence and a second subsequence of the same length; the network device uses the first subsequence and the second subsequence Mapping to different portions of the second resource, respectively;
- the transceiver is configured to send the first subsequence and the second subsequence through different parts of the second resource.
- Each of the two M sequences has a length of I, I is a natural number, and I has a value range of 31 ⁇ I ⁇ 2 31 -1.
- I is 3344
- N c is 3200
- G is 3344
- the at least one subsequence is two subsequences
- n k 1 , . . . , k 1 +71
- n k 2 ,..., k 2 +71.
- the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
- the processor is further configured to map the first sub-sequence and the second sub-sequence to different parts of the second resource, respectively;
- the transceiver is configured to send the first subsequence and the second subsequence through different parts of the second resource.
- a terminal device including a transceiver and a processor, wherein
- the processor obtains a set of candidate sequences, where the set of candidate sequences includes a plurality of candidate sequences, and a process of generating one of the plurality of candidate sequences includes: generating two M sequences according to the LFSR And cyclically shifting the two M sequences to generate a Gold sequence; and extracting at least one subsequence from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence, the start of the subsequence being intercepted
- the location is determined according to one of the value sets corresponding to the partial information in the indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the ordering of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set;
- the transceiver is configured to detect a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device
- the processor is further configured to select, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal;
- a method for transmitting a synchronization signal including:
- the network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining an order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set, the synchronization signal block including a physical broadcast channel PBCH symbol;
- the network device generates at least one set of output sequences according to a linear feedback shift register LFSR, wherein each of the at least one set of output sequences includes two output sequences;
- the network device respectively cyclically shifts each set of the output sequences to generate a corresponding Gold sequence, thereby obtaining at least one Gold sequence, and the number of bits of the cyclic shift is determined according to the partial information;
- the network device Generating, by the network device, one demodulation reference signal sequence according to each of the at least one Gold sequence, the demodulation reference signal sequence being used for time-frequency resources mapped to the PBCH symbol
- the signal transmitted in the medium is demodulated
- the time-frequency resource includes a first resource and a second resource
- the network device transmits the demodulation reference signal sequence by using the second resource.
- the network device uses an LFSR to generate at least one set of output sequences according to a predetermined initial value (the output sequence may be an M sequence directly generated by the LFSR, or may be based on the LFSR. Another sequence obtained after the directly generated M sequence is complemented, and then cyclically shifting each set of output sequences to add a Gold sequence, thereby obtaining at least one Gold sequence, wherein the number of bits of the cyclic shift is according to the indication Part of the information in the information is determined such that the Gold sequence generated from the M sequence, and the demodulation reference signal sequence intercepted from the Gold sequence, uniquely correspond to the partial information.
- part of the information is carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner, instead of transmitting the indication information through the PBCH in a manner of being displayed, thereby reducing the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH and saving the PBCH.
- Time-frequency resources
- the at least one set of output sequences is a set of M sequences, and the size of the LFSR is 31.
- Each of the two M sequences included in the set of M sequences has a length of I, I is a natural number, and I has a value range of 31 ⁇ I ⁇ 2 31 -1,
- I is 3344
- the at least one set of output sequences is a set of output sequences
- the size of the LFSR is 7, and each output sequence of the set of output sequences has a length of 144.
- the at least one set of output sequences is a set of output sequences
- the size of the LFSR is 7, and each output sequence of the set of output sequences has a length of 144.
- the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
- the network device divides the demodulation reference signal sequence into first subsequences and second subsequences of the same length;
- the network device maps the first subsequence and the second subsequence to different parts of the second resource respectively;
- the first subsequence and the second subsequence are transmitted by different portions of the second resource.
- the at least one set of output sequences is two sets of output sequences
- the size of the LFSR is 6, and each of the two sets of output sequences has a length of 72
- the at least one set of output sequences is two sets of output sequences
- the size of the LFSR is 6, and each of the two sets of output sequences has a length of 72
- the number of bits of the cyclic shift, i 2 is the number of bits that cyclically shift the second output sequence in the first set of output sequences when generating the first set of output sequences corresponding to the Gold sequence, i 1 and/or i 2
- the values are mapped to SS idx1 respectively.
- the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
- Signal sequences r 2 (n) are mapped to different portions of the second resource, respectively;
- a method of transmitting a synchronization signal including
- the terminal device obtains a set of candidate sequences, where the set of candidate sequences includes a plurality of candidate sequences, and a process of generating one of the plurality of candidate sequences includes: generating two M sequences according to the LFSR; Generating at least one set of output sequences, each of the at least one set of output sequences comprising two output sequences; each set of the output sequences is cyclically shifted and then added to generate a Gold sequence, thereby obtaining at least a Gold sequence, the number of bits of the cyclic shift is determined according to one of a set of values corresponding to the partial information in the indication information, the indication information is used to indicate that the synchronization signal block is in the pulse group of the synchronization signal to which it belongs. Sorting; generating, according to each of the Gold sequences in the at least one Gold sequence, one of the demodulation reference signal sequences;
- the terminal device detects a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device
- the terminal device selects, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal;
- a network device including a transceiver and a processor, wherein
- the processor is configured to generate a synchronization signal block and the indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set, where the synchronization signal block includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH symbol;
- each of the at least one set of output sequences comprising two output sequences
- the time-frequency resource includes a first resource and a second resource
- the transceiver is configured to send, by using the first resource, a primary information block MIB and remaining information of the indication information except the partial information; and send the demodulation reference signal by using the second resource. sequence.
- the at least one set of M sequences is a set of M sequences, and the size of the LFSR is 31.
- Each of the two M sequences included in the set of M sequences has a length of I, I is a natural number, and I has a value range of 31 ⁇ I ⁇ 2 31 -1,
- I is 144
- the at least one set of output sequences is a set of output sequences
- the size of the LFSR is 7, and each output sequence of the set of output sequences has a length of 144.
- the at least one set of output sequences is a set of output sequences
- the LFSR has a size of 7
- each of the set of output sequences has a length of 144.
- the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
- the processor is further configured to average the demodulated reference signal sequence into a first subsequence and a second subsequence of the same length; mapping the first subsequence and the second subsequence to the Describe the different parts of the second resource;
- the transceiver is configured to send the first subsequence and the second subsequence through different parts of the second resource.
- the at least one set of output sequences is two sets of output sequences
- the size of the LFSR is 6, and each of the two sets of output sequences has a length of 72
- the at least one set of output sequences is two sets of output sequences
- the size of the LFSR is 6, and each of the two sets of output sequences has a length of 72
- the number of bits of the cyclic shift, i 2 is the number of bits that cyclically shift the second output sequence in the first set of output sequences when generating the first set of output sequences corresponding to the Gold sequence, i 1 and/or i 2
- the values are mapped to SS idx1 respectively.
- the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
- Signal sequences r 2 (n) are mapped to different portions of the second resource, respectively;
- a terminal device including a transceiver and a processor, wherein
- the processor is configured to obtain a candidate sequence set, where the candidate sequence set includes multiple candidate sequences, and a process of generating one of the multiple candidate sequences includes: generating two according to the LFSR An M sequence; generating at least one set of output sequences according to the LFSR, wherein each of the at least one set of output sequences includes two output sequences; each set of the output sequences is cyclically shifted and then added to generate a Gold Sequence, thereby obtaining at least one Gold sequence, the number of bits of the cyclic shift is determined according to one of a set of values corresponding to the partial information in the indication information, the indication information is used to indicate that the synchronization signal block belongs to Sorting the set of synchronization signal pulses; generating one of the demodulation reference signal sequences respectively according to each of the Gold sequences in the at least one Gold sequence;
- the transceiver is configured to detect a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device
- the processor is further configured to select, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal;
- a thirteenth aspect further provides a communication system, comprising the network device according to any one of the foregoing third aspect or the third aspect, and the terminal device of the fourth aspect; or
- a computer readable storage medium having instructions stored therein that, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the methods described in the above aspects.
- a further aspect of the present application provides a computer program product comprising instructions which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform the methods described in the above aspects.
- the indication information is a synchronization signal block time index SBTI.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a network system applied to an embodiment of the present application
- FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of structures of several possible synchronization signal blocks provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application
- FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of an LFSR according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application
- FIG. 6 is a flowchart of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
- FIG. 7 is a flowchart of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 8 is a flowchart of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 9 is a flowchart of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 10 is a flowchart of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of another network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
- an SS burst set includes a maximum of 4 SS blocks at a carrier frequency of 3 GHz.
- an SS burst set contains up to eight SS blocks.
- an SS burst set contains up to 64 SS blocks.
- 6 bits of data are needed, so the communication system is designed to indicate the sorting information of an SS block in the SS burst set, such as the SS Block Time Index (SBTI), which is occupied. 6bit.
- SBTI SS Block Time Index
- MIB main information block
- PHICH Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel
- SFN System Frame Number
- the present application proposes to use the transmission resources other than the time-frequency resources occupied by the MIB in the time-frequency resources corresponding to the PBCH to carry part of the information in the indication information in an implicit manner. Therefore, the time-frequency resource occupied by the MIB in the time-frequency resource corresponding to the PBCH only needs to carry the remaining information in the indication information, thereby reducing the amount of information carried by the time-frequency resource that needs to pass through the PBCH, and saving the time-frequency resource of the PBCH.
- the present application proposes to use a Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS) to carry part of the information in the indication information, such as 2-bit or 3-bit information in the SBTI, in an implicit manner.
- DMRS Demodulation Reference Signal
- the time-frequency resource occupied by the MIB in the PBCH only needs to transmit the remaining 4 bits or 3 bits of information in the SBTI.
- the time-frequency resources occupied by the MIB in the PBCH are saved, and the time-frequency resources occupied by the PBCH are saved.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a network system to which the embodiment of the present application is applied.
- network system 100 can include network device 102 and terminal devices 104, 106, 108, 110, 112, and 114.
- the network device and the terminal device are connected by wireless.
- FIG. 1 is only an example in which the network system includes a network device, but the embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto.
- the system may further include more network devices; similarly, the system may also include more Terminal Equipment.
- a terminal device may also refer to a UE, an access terminal, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, and a user agent.
- the terminal device may also be a handheld device with wireless communication capabilities, a computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device, a terminal device in a future 5G network, or a future evolved public land mobile network (Public Land) Mobile network, PLMN) Terminal devices in the network, etc.
- Public Land Public Land
- the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
- a wearable device which can also be called a wearable smart device, is a general term for applying wearable technology to intelligently design and wear wearable devices such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing, and shoes.
- a wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories.
- Wearable devices are more than just a hardware device, but they also implement powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
- Generalized wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-size, non-reliable smartphones for full or partial functions, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and focus on only one type of application, and need to work with other devices such as smartphones. Use, such as various smart bracelets for smart signs monitoring, smart jewelry, etc.
- the structure and processing flow of the terminal device are described by taking the UE as an example.
- the network device may be a device for communicating with the terminal device, and the network device may be a Global System of Mobile communication (GSM) or a base station in Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) (Base Transceiver Station) , BTS), may also be a base station (NodeB, NB) in a Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) system, or may be an evolved base station in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system (
- the Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB may also be a wireless controller in a Cloud Radio Access Network (CRAN) scenario, or a base station (gNB or gNodeB) in a future 5G network.
- CRAN Cloud Radio Access Network
- gNB or gNodeB base station in a future 5G network.
- the structure and processing flow of the network device are described by taking a base station as an example.
- FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of structures of several possible synchronization signal blocks provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- a sync signal pulse set includes a plurality of SS blocks, and a sync signal pulse set map is transmitted on at least one slot.
- an SS block includes a Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS) of 1 OFDM symbol or a New Radio Primary Synchronization Signal (NR-PSS), and 1 OFDM symbol.
- PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
- NR-PSS New Radio Secondary Synchronization Signal
- 2 OFDM symbols Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH) or new wireless physical broadcast channel (New Radio Physical Broadcast Channel, NR-PBCH).
- PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
- NR-PBCH New Radio Physical Broadcast Channel
- NR-PBCH New Radio Physical Broadcast Channel
- NR-PSS and NR-SSS can respectively have the functions of PSS and SSS in a legacy standard (for example, LTE).
- NR-PSS can be used to determine OFDM symbol timing, frequency synchronization, slot timing, and cell ID within a cell group;
- NR-SSS can be used to determine frame timing, cell groups, and the like.
- the NR-PSS and the NR-SSS may have different functions from the current PSS and the SSS, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the NR-PSS and the NR-SSS may also adopt the same or different sequences as the current PSS and the SSS, and the embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto.
- the NR-PBCH may have the same or different functions as the PBCH in the traditional standard (for example, LTE), which is not limited by the embodiment of the present invention.
- the NR-PBCH may carry a Master Information Block (MIB).
- MIB Master Information Block
- NR-PSS and PSS are collectively referred to as PSS
- NR-SSS and SSS are collectively referred to as SSS
- NR-PBCH and PBCH are collectively referred to as PBCH.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application. The method illustrated in Figure 3 includes the following steps.
- Step 30 The network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set.
- the network device in the case of the base station can generate the indication information indicating the ordering of the ss block in the burst of the synchronization signal in the ss block.
- the SBTI is used as an example to describe the indication information.
- the SBTI may be a chip or a program in the network device for implementing wireless protocol stack processing in a Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer, a Media Access Control (MAC) layer, or a physical (Pyhsical, PHY).
- RRC Radio Resource Control
- MAC Media Access Control
- PHY physical
- Step 31 The network device generates a demodulation reference signal sequence according to part of the information in the indication information.
- the partial information in the indication information refers to the content in the predetermined bit in the indication information.
- SBTI occupies a total of 6 bits, and part of the information refers to 2 bits or 3 bits in SBIT.
- the position of the bit corresponding to the partial information in the SBTI is not limited, and may be two consecutive or three-bit contents in the SBIT, or may be two-bit or three-bit content in the SBIT.
- the partial information refers to 2 bits in the SBIT as an example.
- the partial information may be the content in the 1-2 bit in the SBTI, or the content in the 3-4 bit in the SBTI, or may be the reciprocal in the SBIT.
- the content in 1-2 bits may be the content of the first bit and the last bit in the SBIT. Specifically, it is assumed that the SBTI is 00 1100, and if the partial information is the content in the 1-2th bit in the SBTI, the partial information is 00.
- the demodulation reference signal sequence is used to demodulate a signal transmitted in a time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping.
- the demodulation reference signal sequence is used to perform a signal transmitted in the PBCH. Demodulation, thereby obtaining information transmitted in the PBCH, such as MIB, from the demodulation result.
- the process of generating a demodulation reference signal generally includes the following steps: First, an M sequence is generated according to a Linear Feedback Shift Register (LFSR). Next, the M sequence is cyclically shifted to obtain a Gold sequence. Finally, a subsequence is intercepted from the Gold sequence as a demodulation reference signal sequence, or the Gold sequence is transformed to obtain a demodulation reference signal sequence.
- LFSR Linear Feedback Shift Register
- Figure 4 is a schematic view showing the structure of an LFSR.
- the LFSR can be described by a polynomial, and the feedback point in the LFSR corresponds to the coefficient ⁇ i in the polynomial.
- the number of terms of a polynomial can also be considered as the size of the LFSR.
- an M sequence can be uniquely generated according to a polynomial of a given coefficient and an initial value.
- the length of the M sequence is denoted by I, and the range of I is L ⁇ I ⁇ 2. L -1.
- a sequence corresponding to a polynomial is an M sequence
- the polynomial that generates the M sequence is also called a primitive polynomial.
- the M sequence is a pseudo-random sequence with good cross-correlation and good cyclic shift correlation.
- Good cross-correlation means that correlation operations are performed between two M sequences generated by different LFSRs, and the energy of the correlation peak is small.
- a good cyclic shift correlation refers to the correlation between an M sequence and a sequence obtained by cyclic shifting itself, and the energy of the correlation peak is small.
- the process of finding the primitive polynomial can refer to the existing literature and will not be described in detail herein.
- a set of initial values needs to be set for the LFSR.
- This set of initial values may also be referred to as the initial value of the M sequence, ie, the initial L in the M sequence.
- the value of the symbols may also be referred to as the initial value of the symbols.
- the two M sequences are cyclically shifted to obtain a Gold sequence. And demodulating the reference signal sequence according to the Gold sequence in a predetermined manner. If the partial information in the SBTI is applied in the process of generating the demodulation reference signal sequence as described above, so that the Gold sequence uniquely corresponds to the partial information in the SBTI, the demodulation reference signal sequence and the M sequence are substantially uniquely corresponding.
- the network device generates a demodulation reference signal sequence based on the partial information in the SBTI and transmits a demodulation reference signal sequence.
- the terminal device may obtain partial information in the SBTI according to the detected demodulation reference signal sequence by using an inverse process corresponding to the network device generating the demodulation reference signal sequence.
- the terminal device combines part of the information in the obtained SBTI with the rest of the information in the SBTI explicitly transmitted through the first resource in the PBCH to obtain a complete SBTI.
- the network device may apply part of the information in the SBTI to the process of generating the demodulation reference signal sequence in multiple manners, so that the demodulation reference signal sequence implicitly carries the SBTI.
- Part of the information include, but are not limited to, initializing the initial value of the LFSR using partial information in the SBTI, or determining the number of bits of the cyclic shift when the M sequence is cyclically shifted to generate the Gold sequence using partial information in the SBTI, or using the SBTI
- the partial information determines the starting position when the demodulated reference signal sequence is intercepted from the longer Gold sequence.
- Step 32 The network device sends, by using the first resource in the PBCH, the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information.
- the embodiment of the present application distinguishes different resources, and divides the time-frequency resources of the PBCH symbol mapping into two categories, that is, the first resource and the second resource.
- the first resource is a time-frequency resource used to transmit the primary information block MIB in the time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping.
- the second resource is a time-frequency resource different from the first resource in the time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping.
- the second resource may be a resource other than the first resource in the time-frequency resource mapped by the PBCH symbol, or may be a partial resource other than the first resource.
- the network device maps the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information into the first resource. Still taking SBIT as an example, suppose the SBTI is 00 1100. If part of the information is the content of the first bit and the second bit in the SBTI, the partial information is 00, and the remaining information is 1100. The network device maps 1100 to a resource element (Resource Element, RE) of the first resource, and then transmits the remaining information 1100 through the RE.
- RE resource Element
- Step 33 The network device sends the demodulation reference signal sequence by using the second resource.
- the network device maps the partial information into the second resource. Still taking SBIT as an example, the network device maps 00 to the RE of the second resource, and then sends the partial information 00 through the RE.
- the network device carries the partial information in the indication information of the order of the SS block in the SS burst set to be carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner. Instead of transmitting the indication information all by way of display through the PBCH, the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH is reduced, and the time-frequency resources of the PBCH are saved.
- FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 5 is a detailed description of the generation process of the demodulation reference signal sequence, the transmission process of the demodulation reference signal, and the reception process of the terminal device on the basis of FIG.
- the network device selects a LFSR having a larger size, and initializes an initial value of the LFSR according to part of the information in the indication information, thereby generating a longer length corresponding to the partial information.
- M sequence is cyclically shifted to obtain a longer Gold sequence, and a subsequence is intercepted from the Gold sequence as a demodulation reference signal sequence.
- Step 50 The network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set.
- Step 51 The network device generates two M sequences according to the LFSR, where the length of the M sequence is I, and I is a natural number, and the initial value c init of the LFSR is determined according to part of the information in the indication information.
- the size of the LFSR (ie, the maximum number of possible terms of the primitive polynomial) is denoted by L, and the length of the M sequence generated by the LFSR is expressed as I, and the value of I ranges from L ⁇ I ⁇ 2 L -1.
- L takes a value of 31.
- the length I of the M sequence generated by the LFSR ranges from 31 ⁇ I ⁇ 2 31 -1.
- the length I of the M sequence is 3344.
- the LFSR generates two M sequences based on two primitive polynomials, respectively. The embodiment of the present application will distinguish different polynomials in the subsequent description manners using the "first primitive polynomial” and the “second primitive polynomial", and subsequently describe the "first subsequence” and the "second subsequence” in a similar manner. "Wait, not to indicate a sequence relationship, but to distinguish between different subsequences.”
- the network device initializes the initial values of the two M sequences according to the partial information, that is, x 0 (0) to x 0 (30), and the values of x 1 (0) to x 1 (30).
- the initial value of the first M sequence is
- the PCID is a cell identifier of a cell covered by the network device.
- the partial information is the 2-bit content in the SBTI
- all possible values of the partial information are 00, 01, 10, and 11, and the values corresponding to the SS idx are 0, 1, 2, and 3.
- the partial information is the 3-bit content in the SBTI
- all possible values of the partial information are 000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110, 111, and the values corresponding to the SS idx are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7.
- Step 53 The network device intercepts a subsequence from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence, and the length of the subsequence intercepted is D, D is a natural number, and D is less than G.
- This embodiment does not limit the starting position when the demodulation reference signal sequence is intercepted from the Gold sequence.
- Step 54 The network device sends, by using the first resource in the PBCH, the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information.
- the network device sends, by using the first resource in the PBCH, the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information.
- the second resource in the PBCH may include different parts, that is, part of the time-frequency resources corresponding to the first PBCH symbol in the 2 PBCH symbols, and the 2 Part of the time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol in the PBCH symbols.
- Step 55 The network device averages the demodulated reference signal sequence r(n) into a first subsequence and a second subsequence of the same length. For example, the network device divides the demodulated reference signal sequence of length 144 into a first subsequence and a second subsequence of length 72.
- Step 56 The network device maps the first subsequence and the second subsequence to different parts of the second resource, respectively. For example, the first sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol, and the second sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
- Step 57 The network device sends the first subsequence and the second subsequence through different parts of the second resource.
- the first sub-sequence is transmitted by using a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol
- the second sub-sequence is sent by a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
- the network device initializes the LFSR used to generate the M sequence according to the partial information in the indication information, so that the Gold sequence generated according to the M sequence and the solution intercepted from the Gold sequence are obtained.
- the tone reference signal sequence and the partial information are uniquely corresponding. In this way, part of the information is carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner, instead of transmitting the indication information through the PBCH in a manner of being displayed, thereby reducing the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH and saving the PBCH. Time-frequency resources.
- the terminal device after detecting the demodulation reference signal, performs a process corresponding to steps 51 to 53 in FIG. 5 to obtain partial information carried in the demodulation reference signal, for example, 2 bit or 3 bit in the SBTI. content.
- the terminal device further demodulates the information transmitted in the first resource of the PBCH by using the demodulation reference signal, and obtains the remaining information of the indication information except the partial information from the demodulation result.
- the terminal device combines the obtained partial information with the rest of the information to obtain complete indication information, such as all 6-bit content in the SBTI.
- Step 58 The terminal device obtains a candidate sequence set, where the candidate sequence set includes multiple candidate sequences.
- the set of the candidate sequence may be generated by the terminal device according to the generation rule of the demodulation reference signal shown in steps 51 to 53, or may be acquired by the terminal device from another device.
- the process of generating a candidate sequence by the terminal device or another device includes:
- the two M sequences are cyclically shifted and added to generate a Gold sequence
- a subsequence is taken from the Gold sequence as a candidate sequence.
- the terminal device when the partial information includes the 2-bit data in the indication information, the terminal device generates four candidate sequences by using the methods shown in steps 51 to 53 for all possible four values of the SS idx .
- Step 59 The terminal device detects a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device.
- Step 510 The terminal device selects, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal.
- the terminal device performs correlation detection on the received demodulation reference signal and each candidate sequence in the candidate sequence set, and determines a highest peak of correlation detection peak value with the demodulation reference signal shown.
- the sequence is selected as the selected candidate sequence.
- Step 511 The terminal device determines, according to the selected candidate sequence, part of information used to determine an initial value of the LFSR when the selected candidate sequence is generated.
- the method further includes: step 512, the terminal device demodulates the signal sent by the first resource in the time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping by the network device by using the detected demodulation reference signal, thereby Obtaining the remaining information transmitted by the first resource.
- step 513 the terminal device combines the partial information obtained in step 511 with the remaining information obtained in step 512 to obtain complete indication information.
- FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 are respectively a flowchart of two other methods for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application. 6-7, on the basis of FIG. 3, the generation process of the demodulation reference signal sequence, the transmission process of the demodulation reference signal, and the reception process of the terminal device are described in detail.
- the network device selects a LFSR having a larger size and generates two M sequences according to a predetermined initial value. The two M sequences are then cyclically shifted to generate a longer Gold sequence.
- the generation process of the demodulation reference signal sequence shown in FIG. 6 is characterized in that a Gold sequence is generated, and a sub-sequence is intercepted from the Gold sequence as a demodulation reference signal sequence, and the demodulation reference signal sequence is equally divided into two sub-sequences. , resource mapping is performed on two sub-sequences respectively.
- the process of generating the demodulation reference signal sequence shown in FIG. 7 is characterized in that a Gold sequence is generated, and two short sub-sequences are respectively intercepted from the Gold sequence as a demodulation reference signal sequence, and the two-stage demodulation reference is respectively performed.
- the signal sequence is used for resource mapping.
- FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application.
- Step 60 The network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set.
- Step 61 The network device generates two M sequences by using the LFSR, where the length of the M sequence is I, and I is a natural number.
- the size of the LFSR (ie, the most probable number of levels of the primitive polynomial) is denoted by L.
- the length of the M sequence generated by the LFSR is expressed as I, and the value range of I is L ⁇ I ⁇ 2 L -1.
- L takes a value of 31.
- the length I of the M sequence generated by the LFSR ranges from 31 ⁇ I ⁇ 2 31 -1.
- the length I of the M sequence is 3344.
- the LFSR generates two M sequences based on two primitive polynomials, respectively.
- the network device presets the initial values of the two M sequences, that is, x 0 (0) to x 0 (30), and the values of x 1 (0) to x 1 (30).
- the initial value of the first M sequence is
- the value of N c may range from 0 to 5000.
- the value of N c is 3200
- Step 63 The network device intercepts a sub-sequence from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence, where a starting position when the sub-sequence is intercepted is determined according to the partial information, and the sub-sequence is intercepted.
- the length is D and D is a natural number.
- the network device determines a value k according to the partial information, Where SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information.
- the network device starts with k, and intercepts a sub-sequence of length D from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence.
- Step 64 The network device sends, by using the first resource in the PBCH, the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information.
- the network device sends, by using the first resource in the PBCH, the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information.
- the second resource in the PBCH may include different parts, that is, part of the time-frequency resources corresponding to the first PBCH symbol in the 2 PBCH symbols, and the 2 Part of the time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol in the PBCH symbols.
- Step 65 The network device divides the demodulation reference signal sequence r(n) into first subsequences and second subsequences of the same length. That is, the network device divides the demodulation reference signal sequence of length 144 into a first subsequence and a second subsequence of length 72.
- Step 66 The network device maps the first sub-sequence and the second sub-sequence to different parts of the second resource, respectively. For example, the first sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol, and the second sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
- Step 67 The network device sends the first subsequence and the second subsequence through different parts of the second resource.
- the first sub-sequence is transmitted by using a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol
- the second sub-sequence is sent by a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
- the network device In the method for generating a demodulation reference signal sequence provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device generates a longer Gold sequence according to a larger LFSR.
- the starting position of the truncated sub-sequence is determined according to part of the information in the indication information, such that the truncated demodulation reference signal sequence and the portion are Information is uniquely corresponding.
- part of the information is carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner, instead of transmitting the indication information through the PBCH in a manner of being displayed, thereby reducing the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH and saving the PBCH. Time-frequency resources.
- the terminal device after detecting the demodulation reference signal, performs a process corresponding to steps 61 to 63 in FIG. 6 to obtain partial information carried in the demodulation reference signal, for example, 2 bit or 3 bit in the SBTI. content.
- the terminal device further demodulates the information transmitted in the first resource of the PBCH by using the demodulation reference signal, and obtains the remaining information of the indication information except the partial information from the demodulation result.
- the terminal device combines the obtained partial information with the rest of the information to obtain complete indication information, such as all 6-bit content in the SBTI.
- Step 68 The terminal device obtains a candidate sequence set, where the candidate sequence set includes multiple possible candidate sequences.
- the set of the candidate sequence may be generated by the terminal device according to the generation rule of the demodulation reference signal shown in step 61 to step 63, or may be acquired by the terminal device from another device.
- the process of generating a candidate sequence by the terminal device or another device includes:
- the two M sequences are cyclically shifted and added to generate a Gold sequence
- the terminal device when the partial information includes the 2-bit data in the indication information, the terminal device generates four candidate sequences by using the methods shown in steps 61 to 63 for all possible four values of the SS idx .
- Step 69 The terminal device detects a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device.
- Step 610 The terminal device selects, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal.
- the terminal device performs correlation detection on the received demodulation reference signal and each candidate sequence in the candidate sequence set, and determines a highest peak of correlation detection peak value with the demodulation reference signal shown.
- the sequence is selected as the selected candidate sequence.
- Step 611 The terminal device determines, according to the selected candidate sequence, part of information when determining the selected candidate sequence to determine a starting position when the subsequence is intercepted.
- the method further includes: step 612, the terminal device demodulates the signal sent by the first resource in the time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping by the network device by using the detected demodulation reference signal, thereby Obtaining the remaining information transmitted by the first resource.
- step 613 the terminal device combines the partial information obtained in step 611 with the remaining information obtained in step 612 to obtain complete indication information.
- FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application.
- Step 70 The network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set.
- Step 71 The network device generates two M sequences through the LFSR, where the length of the M sequence is I, and I is a natural number.
- Step 71 in FIG. 7 is similar to step 61 in FIG. 6.
- Step 72 in FIG. 7 is similar to step 62 in FIG. 6, and reference may be made to the detailed description of the relevant steps in FIG. repeat.
- Step 73 The network device intercepts two sub-sequences from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence, where a starting position when the sub-sequence is intercepted is determined according to the partial information, and the sub-sequence is intercepted.
- the length is D and D is a natural number.
- the network device determines two starting positions based on the partial information, and the two starting positions are represented by k 1 and k 2 , respectively.
- k 2 N c - k 1 +1, where SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information.
- the first subsequence has a length of 72.
- the network device starts with k 2 as a starting position, and intercepts a second subsequence from the Gold sequence, where the length of the second subsequence is also D, and the first subsequence and the second subsequence are The demodulation reference signal sequence.
- the second subsequence has a length of 72.
- I is 3344
- N c is 3200
- G is 3344
- D is 72
- n k 1 . .., k 1 +71
- n k 2 , . . . , k 2 +71.
- Step 74 The network device sends, by using the first resource in the PBCH, the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information.
- the network device sends, by using the first resource in the PBCH, the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information.
- the second resource in the PBCH may include different parts, that is, part of the time-frequency resources corresponding to the first PBCH symbol in the 2 PBCH symbols, and the 2 Part of the time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol in the PBCH symbols.
- Step 75 The network device maps the first sub-sequence r 1 (n) and the second sub-sequence r 2 (n) to different parts of the second resource, respectively. For example, the first sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol, and the second sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
- Step 76 The network device sends the first sub-sequence r 1 (n) and the second sub-sequence r 2 (n) through different parts of the second resource.
- the first sub-sequence is transmitted by using a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol
- the second sub-sequence is sent by a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
- the network device In the method for generating a demodulation reference signal sequence provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device generates a longer Gold sequence according to a larger LFSR.
- truncating two sub-sequence demodulation reference signal sequences from a longer Gold sequence truncating the starting position of each sub-sequence is determined according to partial information in the indication information, such that the truncated demodulation reference signal sequence is Some of the information is unique. In this way, part of the information is carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner, instead of transmitting the indication information through the PBCH in a manner of being displayed, thereby reducing the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH and saving the PBCH. Time-frequency resources.
- the terminal device after detecting the demodulation reference signal, performs a process corresponding to step 71 to step 73 in FIG. 7 to obtain partial information carried in the demodulation reference signal, for example, 2 bit or 3 bit in the SBTI. content.
- the terminal device further demodulates the information transmitted in the first resource of the PBCH by using the demodulation reference signal, and obtains the remaining information of the indication information except the partial information from the demodulation result.
- the terminal device combines the obtained partial information with the rest of the information to obtain complete indication information, such as all 6-bit content in the SBTI.
- Step 77 The terminal device obtains a candidate sequence set, where the candidate sequence set includes multiple candidate sequences.
- the set of the candidate sequence may be generated by the terminal device according to the generation rule of the demodulation reference signal shown in step 71 to step 73, or may be acquired by the terminal device from another device.
- the process of generating a candidate sequence by the terminal device or another device includes:
- the two M sequences are cyclically shifted and added to generate a Gold sequence
- the terminal device when the partial information includes the 2-bit data in the indication information, the terminal device generates four candidate sequences by using the methods shown in steps 71-73 for all possible four values of the SS idx .
- Step 78 The terminal device detects a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device.
- Step 79 The terminal device selects, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal.
- the terminal device performs correlation detection on the received demodulation reference signal and each candidate sequence in the candidate sequence set, and determines a highest peak of correlation detection peak value with the demodulation reference signal shown.
- the sequence is selected as the selected candidate sequence.
- Step 710 The terminal device determines, according to the selected candidate sequence, part of information for determining a starting position when the selected sequence is to be selected when the selected sequence is to be intercepted.
- the method further includes:
- Step 711 The terminal device demodulates the signal sent by the first resource in the time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping by using the detected demodulation reference signal, so as to obtain the remaining information sent by the first resource.
- Step 712 the terminal device combines the partial information obtained in step 710 with the remaining information obtained in step 711, thereby obtaining complete indication information.
- FIG. 8 , FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are respectively a flowchart of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal provided by an embodiment of the present application. 8 , FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 on the basis of FIG. 3, focusing on the generation process of the demodulation reference signal sequence, the transmission process of the demodulation reference signal, and the reception process of the terminal device are described in detail. In the process of generating the demodulation reference signal sequence shown in FIG. 8 to FIG.
- the network device selects an LFSR, and generates at least one set of output sequences according to a predetermined initial value (the output sequence may be an M sequence directly generated by the LFSR, It may be another sequence obtained after the M sequence is directly complemented by the LFSR, and then each of the output sequences is cyclically shifted and added to obtain a Gold sequence, thereby obtaining at least one Gold sequence, wherein the number of bits of the cyclic shift is It is determined according to part of the information in the indication information.
- the output sequence may be an M sequence directly generated by the LFSR, It may be another sequence obtained after the M sequence is directly complemented by the LFSR, and then each of the output sequences is cyclically shifted and added to obtain a Gold sequence, thereby obtaining at least one Gold sequence, wherein the number of bits of the cyclic shift is It is determined according to part of the information in the indication information.
- the process of generating the demodulation reference signal sequence shown in FIG. 8 is characterized in that the network device selects a larger LFSR, generates a set of M sequences according to a predetermined initial value, and then cyclically shifts the M sequence to generate a longer one.
- the Gold sequence thereby obtaining a Gold sequence, wherein the number of bits of the cyclic shift is determined based on the partial information in the indication information.
- the network device further intercepts a subsequence from the Gold sequence as a demodulation reference signal sequence.
- the network device selects a LFSR having a smaller size and generates at least one set of M sequences according to a predetermined initial value.
- An output sequence is obtained by cyclically complementing each M sequence.
- each set of output sequences is cyclically shifted and added to generate a shorter Gold sequence, thereby obtaining at least one Gold sequence, wherein the number of bits of the cyclic shift is determined according to part of the information in the indication information.
- a demodulation reference signal sequence having the same length as the Gold sequence is generated according to each Gold sequence.
- the difference in the generation process of the demodulation reference signal sequence shown in Figs. 9 and 10 is that the number and length of the generated Gold sequences are different.
- the method LFSR shown in FIG. 9 generates a set of output sequences, and then generates a Gold sequence. After generating a demodulation reference signal sequence according to the Gold sequence, the demodulation reference signal sequence is equally divided into two sub-sequences of the same length, respectively. Two sub-sequences are used for resource mapping.
- FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application.
- Step 80 The network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set.
- Step 81 The network device generates two M sequences by using the LFSR, where the length of the M sequence is I, and I is a natural number.
- the size of the LFSR (ie, the most probable number of levels of the primitive polynomial) is denoted by L.
- the length of the M sequence generated by the LFSR is expressed as I, and the value range of I is L ⁇ I ⁇ 2 L -1.
- L takes a value of 31.
- the length I of the M sequence generated by the LFSR ranges from 31 ⁇ I ⁇ 2 31 -1.
- the length I of the M sequence is 3344.
- the LFSR generates two M sequences based on two primitive polynomials, respectively.
- the network device presets the initial values of the two M sequences, that is, x 0 (0) to x 0 (30), and the values of x 1 (0) to x 1 (30).
- the initial value of the first M sequence is
- n is a natural number less than or equal to 21.
- Step 82 the network device a partial indication information, determining a cyclic shift bits N c.
- N c 3200 * (SS idx +1), where SS idx is a decimal representation of the partial information.
- Step 83 The network device adds the N c -bit cyclic shift to the two M sequences, and generates a Gold sequence.
- Step 84 The network device intercepts a sub-sequence from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence, and the length of the sub-sequence intercepted is D, and D is a natural number.
- Step 85 The network device sends, by using the first resource in the PBCH, the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information.
- Step 85 please refer to the description of step 32 in FIG.
- the manner in which the network device transmits the demodulation reference signal sequence is similar to the demodulation reference signal generated by the method shown in FIG. 6, and is only used here. Brief description.
- Step 86 The network device divides the demodulation reference signal sequence r(n) into a first subsequence and a second subsequence.
- the network device divides the demodulation reference signal sequence of length 144 into a first subsequence and a second subsequence of length 72.
- Step 87 The network device maps the first subsequence and the second subsequence to different parts of the second resource, respectively. For example, the first sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol, and the second sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
- Step 88 The network device sends the first subsequence and the second subsequence through different parts of the second resource.
- the first sub-sequence is transmitted by using a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol
- the second sub-sequence is sent by a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
- the network device In the method for generating a demodulation reference signal sequence provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device generates a M sequence by using a larger LFSR, and determines a loop when the Gold sequence is cyclically shifted to generate a Gold sequence according to part of the information in the indication information. The value is shifted such that the Gold sequence generated from the M sequence and the demodulated reference signal sequence intercepted from the Gold sequence uniquely correspond to the partial information. In this way, part of the information is carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner, instead of transmitting the indication information through the PBCH in a manner of being displayed, thereby reducing the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH and saving the PBCH. Time-frequency resources.
- the terminal device after detecting the demodulation reference signal, performs a process corresponding to steps 81 to 84 in FIG. 8 to obtain partial information carried in the demodulation reference signal, for example, 2 bit or 3 bit in the SBTI. content.
- the terminal device further demodulates the information transmitted in the first resource of the PBCH by using the demodulation reference signal, and obtains the remaining information of the indication information except the partial information from the demodulation result.
- the terminal device combines the obtained partial information with the rest of the information to obtain complete indication information, such as all 6-bit content in the SBTI.
- Step 89 The terminal device obtains a candidate sequence set, where the candidate sequence set includes multiple possible candidate sequences.
- the set of the candidate sequence may be generated by the terminal device according to the generation rule of the demodulation reference signal shown in step 61 to step 63, or may be acquired by the terminal device from another device.
- the process of generating a candidate sequence by the terminal device or another device includes:
- each of the at least one set of output sequences comprising two output sequences
- Each group of the output sequences is cyclically shifted and added to generate a Gold sequence, thereby obtaining at least one Gold sequence, and the number of bits of the cyclic shift is one of the set of values corresponding to the partial information in the indication information.
- the value of the species is determined;
- the terminal device when the partial information includes the 2-bit data in the indication information, the terminal device generates four candidate sequences by using the methods shown in steps 81 to 84 for all possible four values of the SS idx .
- Step 810 The terminal device detects a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device.
- Step 811 The terminal device selects, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal.
- the terminal device performs correlation detection on the received demodulation reference signal and each candidate sequence in the candidate sequence set, and determines a highest peak of correlation detection peak value with the demodulation reference signal shown.
- the sequence is selected as the selected candidate sequence.
- Step 812 The terminal device determines, according to the selected candidate sequence, part of the information used to determine the number of bits of the cyclic shift when the selected candidate sequence is generated.
- the method further includes:
- Step 813 The terminal device demodulates the signal sent by the first resource in the time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping by using the detected demodulation reference signal, so as to obtain the remaining information sent by the first resource.
- step 814 the terminal device combines the partial information obtained in step 812 with the remaining information obtained in step 813 to obtain complete indication information.
- FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application.
- Step 90 The network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set.
- Step 91 The network device generates a set of output sequences by using the LFSR, where the output sequence includes two output sequences, where the length of the output sequence is I, and I is a natural number.
- the size of the LFSR is 7.
- the length of the M sequence directly generated by the LFSR is X
- the value range of X is 7 ⁇ X ⁇ 2 7 -1.
- M sequences can be cycled to produce longer sequences.
- the length I of the output sequence is pre-specified to be 144
- the longest M sequence directly generated by the LFSR is 127. After the 17 bits are complemented by the loop, an output sequence of length 144 is obtained.
- the LFSR generates two output sequences based on two primitive polynomials, respectively.
- the second primitive polynomial is x 7 +x+1.
- Step 92 The network device determines the number of bits of the cyclic shift according to the partial information in the indication information.
- the network device has multiple ways to determine the number of bits of the cyclic shift according to part of the information in the indication information. For example, the number of bits of the cyclic displacement can be determined according to a predetermined formula.
- the partial information is 2 bits or 3 bits of data, the value is limited, and the mapping relationship between all possible values of the partial information and the number of bits of the cyclic shift may be preset, and the number of bits of the cyclic displacement may be determined according to The value of some information is determined by means of look-up table to determine the number of bits of the cyclic displacement. In short, as long as it is a function relationship between the partial information and the number of bits of the cyclic shift, the number of bits of the corresponding cyclic shift can be obtained according to the partial information.
- the present embodiment gives several specific ways of determining the number of bits of the cyclic displacement based on the partial information in the indication information.
- Example 1 Determine the number of bits of the cyclic shift based on a predetermined formula with partial information as a variable.
- the PCID is the cell identifier
- SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information
- the value range of NID1 is 0, 1, ... 335
- the value range of NID2 is 0. 1,2.
- Example 2 Determine the number of bits of the cyclic shift based on a predetermined mapping relationship.
- the number of bits of the cyclic shift has a predetermined mapping relationship with the partial information.
- the two output sequences can be cyclically shifted by the same number of bits, or different numbers of bits can be cyclically shifted. It is also possible to cyclically shift only one of the output sequences without cyclically shifting the other output sequence.
- the partial information is 2 bits and SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information
- the correspondence between the partial information, SS idx and i 1 is as shown in Table 1, wherein i 1 is the number of bits that are cyclically shifted by the first output sequence when the Gold sequence is generated.
- i 1 is the number of bits that are cyclically shifted by the first output sequence when the Gold sequence is generated.
- the correspondence between the partial information, SS idx and i 1 , i 2 is as shown in Table 2.
- i 1 is the number of bits that cyclically shift the first output sequence when generating the Gold sequence
- i 2 is the number of bits that cyclically shift the second output sequence when the Gold sequence is generated.
- the correspondence between the partial information, SS idx and i 1 is as shown in Table 3, wherein i 1 is the number of bits that are cyclically shifted by the first output sequence when the Gold sequence is generated.
- i 1 is the number of bits that are cyclically shifted by the first output sequence when the Gold sequence is generated.
- i 1 is the number of bits that cyclically shift the first output sequence when generating the Gold sequence
- i 2 is the number of bits that cyclically shift the second output sequence when the Gold sequence is generated.
- Step 93 The network device adds cyclic shifts to the two output sequences according to the number of bits of the cyclic shift determined in step 92, and adds a Gold sequence.
- the value of I is 144.
- Step 94 The network device generates, according to the Gold sequence obtained in step 93, one demodulation reference signal sequence, where the length of the demodulation reference signal sequence is G.
- a 144-bit demodulation reference signal sequence can be generated from a 144-bit Gold sequence in the following manner.
- Step 95 The network device sends, by using the first resource in the PBCH, the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information.
- the network device sends, by using the first resource in the PBCH, the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information.
- the second resource in the PBCH may include different parts, that is, part of the time-frequency resources corresponding to the first PBCH symbol in the 2 PBCH symbols, and the 2 Part of the time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol in the PBCH symbols.
- Step 96 The network device averages the demodulated reference signal sequence into a first subsequence and a second subsequence of the same length. That is, the network device divides the demodulation reference signal sequence of length 144 into a first subsequence and a second subsequence of length 72.
- Step 97 The network device maps the first subsequence and the second subsequence to different parts of the second resource, respectively. For example, the first sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol, and the second sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
- Step 98 The network device sends the first subsequence and the second subsequence through different parts of the second resource.
- the first sub-sequence is transmitted by using a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol
- the second sub-sequence is sent by a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
- the network device In the method for generating a demodulation reference signal sequence provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device generates a output sequence by using a small-sized LFSR, and determines a loop when the output sequence is cyclically shifted to generate a Gold sequence according to part of the information in the indication information. The value is shifted such that the Gold sequence generated from the output sequence, and the demodulation reference signal sequence intercepted from the Gold sequence, uniquely correspond to the partial information. In this way, part of the information is carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner, instead of transmitting the indication information through the PBCH in a manner of being displayed, thereby reducing the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH and saving the PBCH. Time-frequency resources.
- the terminal device after detecting the demodulation reference signal, performs a process corresponding to steps 91 to 94 in FIG. 9 to obtain partial information carried in the demodulation reference signal, for example, 2 bit or 3 bit in the SBTI. content.
- the terminal device further demodulates the information transmitted in the first resource of the PBCH by using the demodulation reference signal, and obtains the remaining information of the indication information except the partial information from the demodulation result.
- the terminal device combines the obtained partial information with the rest of the information to obtain complete indication information, such as all 6-bit content in the SBTI.
- the specific process is basically similar to steps 89 to 814 in FIG. 8 and will not be repeated here.
- FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application.
- Step 1000 The network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set.
- Step 1001 The network device generates two sets of output sequences through the LFSR, where each output sequence includes two output sequences, where the length of the output sequence is I, and I is a natural number.
- the size of the LFSR is 6.
- the length of the M sequence generated by the LFSR is X, and the value of X ranges from 6 ⁇ X ⁇ 2 6 -1.
- the M sequence is cyclically complemented to produce a longer M sequence.
- the length I of the M sequence is 72.
- the network device generates a first set of output sequences based on two primitive polynomials:
- the network device generates a second set of output sequences based on two other primitive polynomials:
- the third primitive polynomial is x 6 +x 5 +x 3 +x 2 +1
- the LFSR generating a second of the second set of output sequences
- the initial value at the time of outputting the sequence is x 0- (1)
- Step 1002 The network device determines the number of bits of the cyclic shift according to the partial information in the indication information.
- the network device has a plurality of ways to determine the number of bits of the cyclic shift when each group of M sequences generates a Gold sequence based on the partial information in the indication information.
- the present embodiment gives several specific ways of determining the number of bits of the cyclic displacement based on the partial information in the indication information.
- Example 1 Determine the number of bits of the cyclic shift based on a predetermined formula with partial information as a variable.
- i 1 is a number of bits that cyclically shift the first output sequence in the first set of output sequences when the Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences is generated, and i 2 is generated to generate the first set of output sequences.
- the Gold sequence is the number of bits that are cyclically shifted for the second output sequence in the first set of output sequences.
- i 2- (SS idx2 mod 2)+(NID1 mod 112)
- i 1- is the number of bits that cyclically shift the first output sequence in the second set of output sequences when generating the Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences
- i 2 - is to generate the second set of outputs The number of bits of the second output sequence in the second set of output sequences that are cyclically shifted when the sequence corresponds to the Gold sequence
- the PCID is the cell identifier
- SS idx SS idx1 + SS idx2
- SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information
- the value range of NID1 is 0, 1, ... 335
- the value range of NID2 is 0, 1, 2.
- Example 2 Determine the number of bits of the cyclic shift based on a predetermined mapping relationship.
- the number of bits of the cyclic shift has a predetermined mapping relationship with the partial information.
- the number of bits of the cyclic shift is expressed as (i 1 , i 2 ) and (i 1 , i 2 ⁇ ), where i 1 is the first group when generating the Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences a number of bits of the first output sequence in the output sequence that are cyclically shifted, and i 2 is a number of bits that cyclically shift the second output sequence in the first set of output sequences when the first set of output sequences are corresponding to the Gold sequence ,
- i 1 the number of bits cyclically shifted by the first output sequence in the second set of output sequences when generating the Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences
- i 2 - generating the second set of output sequences
- i 1 and/or i 2 are respectively mapped to SS idx1 , and the mapping relationship between i 1 and/or i 2 and SS idx1 is similar to Table 1 to Table 4 in the above embodiment, except that Table 1 to Table Replace SS idx in 4 with SS idx1 .
- SS idx SS idx1 + SS idx2
- SS idx is a decimal representation of the partial information.
- the values of i 1- and/or i 2- have a mapping relationship with SS idx2 respectively, and the mapping relationship between i 1- and/or i 2- and SS idx2 is similar to that of Tables 1 to 4 in the above embodiment, except that The SS idx in Table 1 to Table 4 is replaced by SS idx2 .
- Step 1003 The network device adds, according to the bit value of the cyclic shift determined in step 1002, the cyclic output of the two output sequences included in the output sequence of the group to the output sequence of each group, and generates a corresponding output sequence of the group.
- Gold sequence resulting in two Gold sequences.
- Step 1004 The network device generates a demodulation reference signal sequence according to each Gold sequence obtained in step 1003, to obtain two demodulation reference signal sequences, where the demodulation reference signal sequence has a length of G.
- Step 1005 The network device sends, by using the first resource in the PBCH, the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information.
- Step 1005 please refer to the description of step 32 in FIG.
- the second resource in the PBCH may include different parts, that is, part of the time-frequency resources corresponding to the first PBCH symbol in the 2 PBCH symbols, and the 2 Part of the time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol in the PBCH symbols.
- Step 1006 The network device generates a demodulation reference signal sequence r 1 (n) generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the first group of output sequences, and a demodulation reference signal generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the second group of output sequences.
- the sequence r 2 (n) is mapped to different portions of the second resource, respectively.
- Step 1007 The network device sends, by using different parts of the second resource, the demodulation reference signal sequence generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the first group of output sequences, and the Gold corresponding to the second group of output sequences. A sequence of demodulated reference signal sequences.
- the network device In the method for generating a demodulation reference signal sequence provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device generates a two-group output sequence by using a small-sized LFSR, and determines, according to part of the information in the indication information, cyclic shift of each output sequence to generate a Gold.
- the cyclic shift value at the time of sequence such that the Gold sequence generated from the M sequence and the demodulation reference signal sequence generated from the Gold sequence uniquely correspond to the partial information.
- part of the information is carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner, instead of transmitting the indication information through the PBCH in a manner of being displayed, thereby reducing the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH and saving the PBCH. Time-frequency resources.
- the terminal device after detecting the demodulation reference signal, performs a process corresponding to steps 1001 to 1004 in FIG. 10 to obtain partial information carried in the demodulation reference signal, for example, 2 bit or 3 bit in the SBTI. content.
- the terminal device further demodulates the information transmitted in the first resource of the PBCH by using the demodulation reference signal, and obtains the remaining information of the indication information except the partial information from the demodulation result.
- the terminal device combines the obtained partial information with the rest of the information to obtain complete indication information, such as all 6-bit content in the SBTI.
- the specific process is basically similar to steps 89 to 814 in FIG. 8 and will not be repeated here.
- the embodiment of the present application further provides a network device.
- the network device can be a base station.
- 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device.
- the network device functions as the network device in FIG. 1 to implement the functions of the network device in the foregoing embodiments.
- the network device includes a transceiver 1110 and a processor 1120.
- the transceiver 1110 may be referred to as a remote radio unit (RRU), a transceiver unit, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit or the like.
- the transceiver 1110 can include at least one antenna 1111 and a radio frequency unit 1112.
- the transceiver 1110 can be used for transceiving radio frequency signals and converting radio frequency signals with baseband signals.
- the network device includes one or more baseband units (BBUs) 1130.
- the baseband unit 1130 includes a processor 1120.
- the baseband unit 1130 is mainly used for baseband processing, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, etc., and controlling the base station.
- the transceiver 1110 and the baseband unit 1130 may be physically disposed together or physically separated, that is, distributed base stations.
- the baseband unit 1130 may be composed of one or more boards, and the multiple boards may jointly support a single access system radio access network, or may respectively support different access systems.
- the baseband unit 1130 may further include a memory 1140 for storing necessary instructions and data.
- the processor 1120 can be used to control the network device to perform corresponding operations in the foregoing method embodiments.
- the processor 1120 is configured to generate a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set, in the synchronization signal block.
- a physical broadcast channel PBCH symbol includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH symbol; generate two M sequences according to the linear feedback shift register LFSR, the initial value of the LFSR is determined according to part of the information in the indication information; cyclically shifting the two M sequences to generate a Gold sequence; a subsequence is intercepted from the Gold sequence as a demodulation reference signal sequence, and the demodulation reference signal sequence is used to demodulate a signal transmitted in a time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping,
- the time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping includes a first resource and a second resource, where the first resource is a time-frequency resource used for transmitting the primary information block MIB in the time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping, and the second resource is And being a time-frequency
- the transceiver 1110 is configured to send, by using the first resource, the remaining information except the partial information in the indication information, and send the demodulation reference signal sequence by using the second resource.
- the processor 1120 generates a detailed process of demodulating the reference signal sequence, and a detailed process of the transceiver 1110 transmitting the demodulation reference signal sequence. Please refer to the foregoing method embodiment, especially FIG. 3, FIG. 4, and FIG. The related description in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5 is not repeated here.
- the processor 1120 is configured to generate a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set, Having a physical broadcast channel PBCH symbol in the sync signal block; generating two M sequences according to the linear feedback shift register LFSR; cyclically shifting the two M sequences to generate a Gold sequence; and extracting at least one subsequence from the Gold sequence
- the demodulation reference signal sequence a starting position when the subsequence is intercepted is determined according to the partial information, and the demodulation reference signal sequence is used for transmitting in a time-frequency resource mapped to the PBCH symbol
- the signal is demodulated, and the time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping includes a first resource and a second resource, where the first resource is used to transmit the main information block MIB in the time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping. a frequency resource, where the second resource is
- the transceiver 1110 is configured to send, by using the first resource, the remaining information except the partial information in the indication information, and send, by using the second resource, the demodulation reference signal sequence.
- the processor 1120 generates a detailed process of demodulating the reference signal sequence, and a detailed process of the transceiver 1110 transmitting the demodulation reference signal sequence. Please refer to the foregoing method embodiment, especially FIG. 3, FIG. 4, and FIG. 6 and related descriptions of the method embodiments shown in FIG. 7 are not repeated here.
- the processor 1120 is configured to generate a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set, Included in the sync signal block is a physical broadcast channel PBCH symbol; at least one set of output sequences is generated according to a linear feedback shift register LFSR, each of the at least one set of output sequences comprising two output sequences; the output for each set Sequences are cyclically shifted and added to generate a corresponding Gold sequence, thereby obtaining at least one Gold sequence, the number of bits of the cyclic shift being determined according to the partial information; according to each of the at least one Gold sequence Generating a demodulation reference signal sequence for demodulating a signal transmitted in a time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping, the time-frequency of the PBCH symbol mapping
- the first resource and the second resource are included in the resource, where the first resource is used to transmit the primary information block MIB in the
- the transceiver 1110 is configured to send, by using the first resource, the remaining information except the partial information in the indication information, and send, by using the second resource, the demodulation reference signal sequence.
- the processor 1120 generates a detailed process of demodulating the reference signal sequence, and a detailed process of the transceiver 1110 transmitting the demodulation reference signal sequence. Please refer to the foregoing method embodiment, especially FIG. 3, FIG. 4, and FIG. The related description in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 10 is not repeated here.
- the embodiment of the present application further provides a network device.
- the network device is a base station.
- the structure and function of the network device will be described below by taking a base station as an example in conjunction with FIG.
- FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device, which is a network device in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, and has the functions of the network device in the method embodiment.
- the network device includes a transceiver unit 121 and a processing unit 122.
- the transceiver unit 121 and the processing unit 122 may be implemented in software or in hardware.
- the transceiver unit 121 can be the transceiver 1110 of FIG. 11, which can be the processor 1120 of FIG.
- FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device.
- the terminal device functions as a terminal device in FIG. 1 to implement the functions of the terminal device shown in the foregoing embodiments.
- the terminal device includes a processor 131 and a transceiver 132.
- the transceiver 132 can include a control circuit and an antenna, wherein the control circuit can be used for converting baseband signals and radio frequency signals and processing the radio frequency signals, and the antenna can be used to transmit and receive radio frequency signals.
- the device may also include other major components of the terminal device, such as memory, input and output devices, and the like.
- the processor 131 can be used to process the communication protocol and the communication data, and control the entire terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program, for example, to support the terminal device to perform the corresponding operations in the foregoing method embodiments.
- the memory 133 is mainly used to store software programs and data. After the terminal device is powered on, the processor 131 can read the software program in the memory, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program.
- the processor 131 is configured to obtain a candidate sequence set, where the candidate sequence set includes multiple candidate sequences, and one of the multiple candidate sequences is selected.
- the generating process includes: generating two M sequences according to the LFSR, where the initial value of the LFSR is determined according to one of the value sets corresponding to the partial information in the indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the synchronization signal Arranging the blocks in the set of synchronization signal pulses; adding the cyclic displacements of the two M sequences to generate a Gold sequence; and extracting a subsequence from the Gold sequence as a candidate sequence;
- the transceiver 132 is configured to detect a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device.
- the processor 131 is further configured to select, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal; and determine to generate the selected one according to the selected candidate sequence. Part of the initial value of the LFSR is used to determine the sequence to be selected.
- the detailed process of the processor 131 obtaining the set of candidate sequences and the detailed process of selecting a candidate sequence with the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal refer to the foregoing method embodiment, especially FIG. The related description in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 is not repeated here.
- the processor 131 is configured to obtain a candidate sequence set, where the candidate sequence set includes multiple candidate sequences, and one of the multiple candidate sequences is to be selected.
- the generating process of the selected sequence includes: generating two M sequences according to the LFSR; adding the cyclic shifts to the two M sequences to generate a Gold sequence; and extracting at least one subsequence from the Gold sequence as the demodulating a reference signal sequence, where the start position of the sub-sequence is determined according to one of the value sets corresponding to the partial information in the indication information, the indication information is used to indicate that the synchronization signal block is in the synchronization Sorting of signal pulse sets;
- the transceiver 132 is configured to detect a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device.
- the processor 131 is further configured to: select, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal; and determine, according to the selected candidate sequence, the generated The selected candidate sequence is used to determine partial information of the starting position when the subsequence is intercepted.
- the detailed process of the processor 131 obtaining the set of candidate sequences and the detailed process of selecting a candidate sequence with the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal refer to the foregoing method embodiment, especially FIG. The related description in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 6-7 is not repeated here.
- the processor 131 is configured to obtain a candidate sequence set, where the candidate sequence set includes multiple candidate sequences, and one of the multiple candidate sequences is to be selected.
- the generating process of the selected sequence includes: generating two M sequences according to the LFSR; generating at least one set of output sequences according to the LFSR, wherein each of the at least one set of output sequences includes two output sequences;
- the output sequence is cyclically shifted and added to generate a Gold sequence, thereby obtaining at least one Gold sequence, and the number of bits of the cyclic shift is determined according to one of the value sets corresponding to the partial information in the indication information,
- the indication information is used to indicate an ordering of the synchronization signal blocks in the associated synchronization signal pulse set; and each of the demodulation reference signal sequences is generated according to each of the Gold sequences in the at least one Gold sequence
- the transceiver 132 is configured to detect a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device.
- the processor 131 is further configured to select, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal; and determine to generate the selected one according to the selected candidate sequence. Part of the information about the number of bits of the cyclic shift is used in the sequence to be selected.
- the detailed process of the processor 131 obtaining the set of candidate sequences and the detailed process of selecting a candidate sequence with the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal refer to the foregoing method embodiment, especially FIG. The related description in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 8-10 is not repeated here.
- the embodiment of the present application further provides a terminal device.
- the terminal device may be the terminal device in each of the foregoing method embodiments, and may have any function of the terminal device in each method embodiment.
- 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device, which is processed by a base station processing unit 141 and a transceiver unit 142.
- the processing unit 141 and the transceiver unit 142 may be implemented in software or in hardware.
- the processing unit 141 may be the processor 131 of FIG. 13, which may be the transceiver 132 of FIG.
- the embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, as shown in FIG. 1, the network system includes a network device and a terminal device, and the network device may be the network device shown in FIG. 11 or FIG. It is the network device shown in Fig. 13 or Fig. 14.
- the above embodiments it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
- software it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
- the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
- the computer program instructions When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in accordance with embodiments of the present invention are generated in whole or in part.
- the computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
- the computer instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium or transferred from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions can be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transfer to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
- the computer readable storage medium can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that includes one or more available media.
- the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (eg, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (SSD)).
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种传输同步信号的方法、一种网络设备和一种终端设备。The present application relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a method for transmitting a synchronization signal, a network device, and a terminal device.
在长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)网络中,用户设备(User Equipment,UE)接入小区之前,首先要进行小区搜索,以获得与小区之间的下行通信链路的同步,并正确获取接入网络所需的系统信息。In a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network, before a user equipment (UE) accesses a cell, a cell search is first performed to obtain a synchronization of a downlink communication link with the cell, and the channel is correctly acquired. System information required to enter the network.
为了支持小区搜索,定义了2个下行同步信号,分别为主同步信号(Primary Synchronization Signal,PSS)和辅同步信号(Secondary Synchronization Signal,SSS)。UE完成小区搜索过程之后,UE已经与小区取得下行同步,此时UE需要获取到小区的系统信息才能知道小区是如何配置的,以便接入该小区并在该小区内正确地工作。系统信息中包括主信息块(MasterInformationBlock,MIB)和系统信息块(SystemInformationBlock,SIB)。其中,MIB是基站通过物理广播信道(Physical Broadcast Channel,PBCH)发送给UE的。同步信号和PBCH分别占用不同的时频资源。In order to support cell search, two downlink synchronization signals are defined, which are a Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS) and a Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS). After the UE completes the cell search process, the UE has obtained downlink synchronization with the cell. At this time, the UE needs to acquire the system information of the cell to know how the cell is configured, so as to access the cell and work correctly in the cell. The system information includes a Master Information Block (MIB) and a System Information Block (SIB). The MIB is sent by the base station to the UE through a Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH). The synchronization signal and the PBCH occupy different time-frequency resources, respectively.
新一代无线接入技术(new radio access technology,NR)的研究提出可以通过波束赋型(beam forming)提高同步信号和广播信号的覆盖距离。为了适应波束赋型的要求,引入了同步信号块(Synchronization Signal block,SS block)的概念。波束与SS block具有可配置的映射关系,例如多波束中的每个波束发送不同的SS block,或者2个波束可以发送同一SS block。Research on a new generation of radio access technology (NR) proposes to increase the coverage distance of the synchronization signal and the broadcast signal by beam forming. In order to adapt to the requirements of beamforming, the concept of Synchronization Signal Block (SS block) is introduced. The beam has a configurable mapping relationship with the SS block, for example, each beam in the multiple beams transmits a different SS block, or two beams can transmit the same SS block.
PSS、SSS和PBCH采用时分复用(Time Division Multiplexing,TDM)的方式组成一个SS block。换句话说,每一个SS block中包括用以传输PSS的正交频分复用(英文:Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing,OFDM)符号、用以传输SSS的OFDM符号和用以传输PBCH的OFDM符号。PSS, SSS, and PBCH form an SS block by using Time Division Multiplexing (TDM). In other words, each SS block includes Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbols for transmitting PSS, OFDM symbols for transmitting SSS, and OFDM symbols for transmitting PBCH.
一个或多个SS block组成一个同步信号脉冲(英文:Synchronization Signal Burst,SS burst),一个或多个SS burst组成一个同步信号脉冲集(英文:Synchronization Signal Burst set,SS burst set)。因此一个SS burst set中包括一个或多个SS block。在一个SS burst set中包含多个SS block的情况下,为了帧对齐等实际需求,通信系统需要增加用以指示一个SS block在所属SS burst set中的排序的信息。One or more SS blocks form a Synchronization Signal Burst (SS burst), and one or more SS bursts form a Synchronization Signal Burst set (SS burst set). Therefore, one SS burst set includes one or more SS blocks. In the case where a SS burst set contains multiple SS blocks, the communication system needs to add information indicating the ordering of an SS block in the associated SS burst set for practical requirements such as frame alignment.
以基站为例的网络设备如何向UE发送上述用以指示一个SS block在所属SS burst set中的排序的信息成为一个需要解决的问题。How the network device taking the base station as an example sends the above information indicating the order of an SS block in the SS burst set to the UE becomes a problem to be solved.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种传输同步信号的方法,用于提供一种网络设备向终端设备发送用以指示一个SS block在所属SS burst set中的排序的指示信息的方案。The embodiment of the present application provides a method for transmitting a synchronization signal, which is used to provide a scheme for a network device to send, to a terminal device, indication information indicating an order of an SS block in an associated SS burst set.
第一方面,提供了一种传输同步信号的方法,包括:In a first aspect, a method of transmitting a synchronization signal is provided, comprising:
网络设备生成同步信号块以及用以指示所述同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序的指示信息,所述同步信号块包括物理广播信道PBCH符号;The network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for indicating the ordering of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set, the synchronization signal block including a physical broadcast channel PBCH symbol;
所述网络设备根据线性反馈位移寄存器LFSR生成两个M序列,所述LFSR的初始值是根据所述指示信息中的部分信息确定的;The network device generates two M sequences according to the linear feedback shift register LFSR, and the initial value of the LFSR is determined according to part of the information in the indication information;
所述网络设备对所述两个M序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列;The network device adds cyclic shifts to the two M sequences, and generates a Gold sequence;
所述网络设备从所述Gold序列中截取一个子序列作为解调参考信号序列,所述解调参考信号序列用于对所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中传输的信号进行解调,The network device intercepts a subsequence from the Gold sequence as a demodulation reference signal sequence, where the demodulation reference signal sequence is used to demodulate a signal transmitted in a time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping,
所述时频资源包括第一资源和第二资源;The time-frequency resource includes a first resource and a second resource;
所述网络设备通过所述第一资源发送主信息块MIB以及所述指示信息中除所述部分信息的之外的其余信息;和Transmitting, by the network device, the primary information block MIB and the remaining information of the indication information except the partial information by using the first resource; and
所述网络设备通过所述第二资源发送所述解调参考信号序列。The network device transmits the demodulation reference signal sequence by using the second resource.
在本申请实施例提供的传输同步信号的方法中,网络设备根据指示信息中的部分信息初始化用以生成M序列的LFSR,从而使得根据M序列生成的Gold序列、以及从Gold序列中截取的解调参考信号序列与所述部分信息是唯一对应的。通过这种方式将部分信息以隐式的方式携带在解调参考信号序列中,而不是将指示信息全部以显示的方式通过PBCH发送,从而减少了在PBCH中传输的数据量,节约了PBCH的时频资源。In the method for transmitting a synchronization signal provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device initializes the LFSR used to generate the M sequence according to the partial information in the indication information, so that the Gold sequence generated according to the M sequence and the solution intercepted from the Gold sequence are obtained. The tone reference signal sequence and the partial information are uniquely corresponding. In this way, part of the information is carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner, instead of transmitting the indication information through the PBCH in a manner of being displayed, thereby reducing the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH and saving the PBCH. Time-frequency resources.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LFSR的尺寸为31,所述的LFSR初始值为c init, 其中c init=2 p*PCID+2 q*SS idx+1,其中PCID是小区标识,SS idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示,p为小于等于20的自然数,q为小于等于27的自然数, In a possible implementation manner, the size of the LFSR is 31, and the initial value of the LFSR is c init . Where c init = 2 p * PCID + 2 q * SS idx +1, where PCID is the cell identifier, SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information, p is a natural number less than or equal to 20, and q is a natural number less than or equal to 27,
所述两个M序列中的每个M序列的长度为I,I为自然数,I的取值范围是31<I<2 31-1, Each of the two M sequences has a length of I, I is a natural number, and I has a value range of 31<I<2 31 -1.
所述两个M序列中的第一个M序列表示为x
0(n+31)=(x
0(n+3)+x
0(n))mod 2,所述第一个M序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
31+x
3+1计算出的,n=I-31;
The first M sequence of the two M sequences is represented as x 0 (n+31)=(x 0 (n+3)+x 0 (n))
所述两个M序列中的第二个M序列表示为x
1(n+31)=(x
1(n+7)+x
1(n))mod 2,所述第二个M序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
31+x
7+1计算出的,n=I-31;
The second M sequence of the two M sequences is represented as x 1 (n+31)=(x 1 (n+7)+x 1 (n))
所述Gold序列表示为c(n)=(x
0(n+N
c)+x
1(n+N
c))mod 2,其中N
c表示所述循环位移的位数,所述Gold序列的长度为G,N
c、G为自然数,且G=I。
The Gold sequence is represented as c(n)=(x 0 (n+N c )+x 1 (n+N c ))
在一种可能的实现方式中,I为3344,N c为3200,G为3344,所述解调参考信号序列表示为r(n)=1-2*c(n),n=1,...,144。 In a possible implementation manner, I is 3344, N c is 3200, G is 3344, and the demodulation reference signal sequence is represented as r(n)=1-2*c(n), n=1,. ..,144.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述同步信号块中包括2个PBCH符号,所述第二资源包括所示2个PBCH符号分别对应的不同部分;In a possible implementation manner, the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
所述网络设备通过所述第二资源发送所述解调参考信号序列,包括:Sending, by the network device, the demodulation reference signal sequence by using the second resource, including:
所述网络设备将所述解调参考信号序列平均分为长度相同的第一子序列和第二子序列;The network device divides the demodulation reference signal sequence into first subsequences and second subsequences of the same length;
所述网络设备将所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列分别映射到所述第二资源的不同部分;The network device maps the first subsequence and the second subsequence to different parts of the second resource respectively;
通过所述第二资源的不同部分发送所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列。The first subsequence and the second subsequence are transmitted by different portions of the second resource.
第二方面,还提供了传输同步信号的方法,包括In a second aspect, a method of transmitting a synchronization signal is also provided, including
终端设备获得待选序列集合,所述待选序列集合中包括多个待选序列,所述多个待选序列中的一个待选序列的生成过程包括:根据LFSR生成两个M序列,所述LFSR的初始值是根据指示信息中的部分信息对应的取值集合中的一种取值确定的,所述指示信息用以指示同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序;对所述两个M序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列;从所述Gold序列中截取一个子序列作为待选序列;The terminal device obtains a set of candidate sequences, where the set of candidate sequences includes a plurality of candidate sequences, and the process of generating one of the plurality of candidate sequences includes: generating two M sequences according to the LFSR, The initial value of the LFSR is determined according to one of the value sets corresponding to the partial information in the indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the ordering of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set; M sequences are cyclically shifted and added to generate a Gold sequence; a subsequence is intercepted from the Gold sequence as a candidate sequence;
所述终端设备检测到网络设备发送的解调参考信号;The terminal device detects a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device;
所述终端设备从所述待选序列集合中选择出与所述解调参考信号相关性最高的一个待选序列;The terminal device selects, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal;
所述终端设备根据所述选择出的待选序列,确定生成所述选择出的待选序列时用以确定LFSR的初始值的部分信息。And determining, by the terminal device, part of information used to determine an initial value of the LFSR when the selected candidate sequence is generated, according to the selected candidate sequence.
第三方面,还提供了一种网络设备,包括收发器和处理器,其中In a third aspect, a network device is provided, including a transceiver and a processor, wherein
所述处理器,用于生成同步信号块以及用以确定所述同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序的指示信息,所述同步信号块中包括物理广播信道PBCH符号;The processor is configured to generate a synchronization signal block and use the indication information to determine the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set, where the synchronization signal block includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH symbol;
根据线性反馈位移寄存器LFSR生成两个M序列,所述LFSR的初始值是根据所述指示信息中的部分信息确定的;Generating two M sequences according to the linear feedback shift register LFSR, the initial value of the LFSR being determined according to part of the information in the indication information;
对所述两个M序列进行循环位移,生成一个Gold序列;Cyclic shifting the two M sequences to generate a Gold sequence;
从所述Gold序列中截取一个子序列作为解调参考信号序列,所述解调参考信号序列用于对所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中传输的信号进行解调,所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中包括第一资源和第二资源,所述第一资源是所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中用以传输主信息块MIB的时频资源,所述第二资源是所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中除所述第一资源之外的时频资源;And extracting a subsequence from the Gold sequence as a demodulation reference signal sequence, where the demodulation reference signal sequence is used to demodulate a signal transmitted in a time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping, where the PBCH symbol is mapped The time-frequency resource includes a first resource and a second resource, where the first resource is a time-frequency resource used to transmit a primary information block MIB in a time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping, and the second resource is the PBCH a time-frequency resource other than the first resource in the time-frequency resource of the symbol mapping;
所述收发器,用于通过所述第一资源发送所述指示信息中除所述部分信息的之外的其余信息,以及通过所述第二资源发送所述解调参考信号序列。The transceiver is configured to send, by using the first resource, the remaining information except the partial information in the indication information, and send the demodulation reference signal sequence by using the second resource.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LFSR的尺寸为31,所述的LFSR初始值为c init, 其中c init=2 p*PCID+2 q*SS idx+1,其中PCID是小区标识,SS idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示,p是小于等于20的自然数,q为小于等于27的自然数, In a possible implementation manner, the size of the LFSR is 31, and the initial value of the LFSR is c init . Where c init = 2 p * PCID + 2 q * SS idx +1, where PCID is the cell identifier, SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information, p is a natural number less than or equal to 20, and q is a natural number less than or equal to 27,
所述两个M序列中的每个M序列的长度为I,I为自然数,I的取值范围是31<I<2 31-1, Each of the two M sequences has a length of I, I is a natural number, and I has a value range of 31<I<2 31 -1.
所述两个M序列中的第一个M序列表示为x
0(n+31)=(x
0(n+3)+x
0(n))mod 2,所述第一个M序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
31+x
3+1计算出的,n=I-31;
The first M sequence of the two M sequences is represented as x 0 (n+31)=(x 0 (n+3)+x 0 (n))
所述两个M序列中的第二个M序列表示为x
1(n+31)=(x
1(n+7)+x
1(n))mod 2,所述第二个M序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
31+x
7+1计算出的,n=I-31;
The second M sequence of the two M sequences is represented as x 1 (n+31)=(x 1 (n+7)+x 1 (n))
所述Gold序列表示为c(n)=(x
0(n+N
c)+x
1(n+N
c))mod 2,其中N
c表示所述循环位移的位数,所述Gold序列的长度为G,N
c、G为自然数,且G=I。
The Gold sequence is represented as c(n)=(x 0 (n+N c )+x 1 (n+N c ))
在一种可能的实现方式中,I为3344,N c为3200,G为3344,所述解调参考信号序列表示为r(n)=1-2*c(n),n=1,...,144。 In a possible implementation manner, I is 3344, N c is 3200, G is 3344, and the demodulation reference signal sequence is represented as r(n)=1-2*c(n), n=1,. ..,144.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述同步信号块中包括2个PBCH符号,所述第二资源包括所示2个PBCH符号分别对应的不同部分;In a possible implementation manner, the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
所述处理器,还用于将所述解调参考信号序列平均分为长度相同的第一子序列和第二子序列;将所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列分别映射到所述第二资源的不同部分;The processor is further configured to average the demodulated reference signal sequence into a first subsequence and a second subsequence of the same length; mapping the first subsequence and the second subsequence to the Describe the different parts of the second resource;
所述收发器,用于通过所述第二资源的不同部分发送所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列。The transceiver is configured to send the first subsequence and the second subsequence through different parts of the second resource.
第四方面,还提供了一种终端设备,包括收发器和处理器,其中In a fourth aspect, a terminal device is provided, including a transceiver and a processor, wherein
所述处理器,用于获得待选序列集合,所述待选序列集合中包括多个待选序列,所述多个待选序列中的一个待选序列的生成过程包括:根据LFSR生成两个M序列,所述LFSR的初始值是根据指示信息中的部分信息对应的取值集合中的一种取值确定的,所述指示信息用以指示同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序;对所述两个M序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列;从所述Gold序列中截取一个子序列作为待选序列;The processor is configured to obtain a candidate sequence set, where the candidate sequence set includes multiple candidate sequences, and a process of generating one of the multiple candidate sequences includes: generating two according to the LFSR The M sequence, the initial value of the LFSR is determined according to one of the value sets corresponding to the partial information in the indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the ordering of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set; Performing cyclic shifting on the two M sequences to add a Gold sequence; and extracting a subsequence from the Gold sequence as a candidate sequence;
所述收发器,用于检测到网络设备发送的解调参考信号;The transceiver is configured to detect a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device;
所述处理器,还用于从所述待选序列集合中选择出与所述解调参考信号相关性最高的一个待选序列;The processor is further configured to select, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal;
根据所述选择出的待选序列,确定生成所述选择出的待选序列时用以确定LFSR的初始值的部分信息。And determining, according to the selected candidate sequence, partial information for determining an initial value of the LFSR when the selected candidate sequence is generated.
第五方面,提供了一种传输同步信号的方法,包括:In a fifth aspect, a method for transmitting a synchronization signal is provided, including:
网络设备生成同步信号块以及用以确定所述同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序的指示信息,所述同步信号块包括物理广播信道PBCH符号;The network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining an order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set, the synchronization signal block including a physical broadcast channel PBCH symbol;
所述网络设备根据线性反馈位移寄存器LFSR生成两个M序列;The network device generates two M sequences according to the linear feedback shift register LFSR;
所述网络设备对所述两个M序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列;The network device adds cyclic shifts to the two M sequences, and generates a Gold sequence;
所述网络设备从所述Gold序列中截取至少一段子序列作为所述解调参考信号序列,所述子序列被截取时的起始位置是根据所述部分信息确定的,所述解调参考信号序列用于对所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中传输的信号进行解调,The network device intercepts at least one subsequence from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence, and a starting position when the subsequence is intercepted is determined according to the partial information, the demodulation reference signal The sequence is configured to demodulate a signal transmitted in the time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping,
所述时频资源中包括第一资源和第二资源;The time-frequency resource includes a first resource and a second resource;
所述网络设备通过所述第一资源发送主信息块MIB以及所述指示信息中除所述部分信息的之外的其余信息;和Transmitting, by the network device, the primary information block MIB and the remaining information of the indication information except the partial information by using the first resource; and
所述网络设备通过所述第二资源发送所述解调参考信号序列。The network device transmits the demodulation reference signal sequence by using the second resource.
在本申请实施例提供的解调参考信号序列的生成方法中,网络设备根据一个尺寸较大的LFSR生成一个较长的Gold序列。在从较长的Gold序列中截取一段子序列解调参考信号序列时,截取子序列的起始位置是根据指示信息中的部分信息确定的,从而使得截取的解调参考信号序列与所述部分信息是唯一对应的。通过这种方式将部分信息以隐式的方式携带在解调参考信号序列中,而不是将指示信息全部以显示的方式通过PBCH发送,从而减少了在PBCH中传输的数据量,节约了PBCH的时频资源。In the method for generating a demodulation reference signal sequence provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device generates a longer Gold sequence according to a larger LFSR. When a sub-sequence demodulation reference signal sequence is intercepted from a longer Gold sequence, the starting position of the truncated sub-sequence is determined according to part of the information in the indication information, such that the truncated demodulation reference signal sequence and the portion are Information is uniquely corresponding. In this way, part of the information is carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner, instead of transmitting the indication information through the PBCH in a manner of being displayed, thereby reducing the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH and saving the PBCH. Time-frequency resources.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LFSR的尺寸为31,所述的LFSR初始值为 其中c init=2 m*PCID+1,其中PCID是小区标识,m是小于等于21的自然数, In a possible implementation manner, the size of the LFSR is 31, and the initial value of the LFSR is Where c init = 2 m * PCID+1, where PCID is the cell identifier and m is a natural number less than or equal to 21.
所述两个M序列中的每个M序列的长度为I,I为自然数,I的取值范围是31<I<2 31-1, Each of the two M sequences has a length of I, I is a natural number, and I has a value range of 31<I<2 31 -1.
所述两个M序列中的第一个M序列表示为x 0(n+31)=(x 0(n+3)+x 0(n))mod 2,所述第一个M序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x 31+x 3+1计算出的,n=I-31; The first M sequence of the two M sequences is represented as x 0 (n+31)=(x 0 (n+3)+x 0 (n)) mod 2, and the first M sequence is The LFSR is calculated according to the polynomial x 31 +x 3 +1, n=I-31;
所述两个M序列中的第二个M序列表示为x 1(n+31)=(x 1(n+7)+x 1(n))mod 2,所述第二个M序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x 31+x 7+1计算出的,n=I-31; The second M sequence of the two M sequences is represented as x 1 (n+31)=(x 1 (n+7)+x 1 (n)) mod 2, and the second M sequence is The LFSR is calculated according to the polynomial x 31 +x 7 +1, n=I-31;
所述Gold序列表示为c(n)=(x 0(n+N c)+x 1(n+N c))mod 2,其中N c表示所述循环位移的位数,所述Gold序列的长度为G,N c、G为自然数,且G=I; The Gold sequence is represented as c(n)=(x 0 (n+N c )+x 1 (n+N c )) mod 2, where N c represents the number of bits of the cyclic shift, the Gold sequence The length is G, N c , G is a natural number, and G=I;
所述子序列被截取时的起始位置表示为k, 其中SS idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示。 The starting position when the subsequence is intercepted is denoted as k, Where SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,I为3344,N c为3200,G为3344,所述至少一个子序列为一个子序列,所述子序列表示为r(n)=1-2*c(n),n=k,...,k+143。 In a possible implementation manner, I is 3344, N c is 3200, G is 3344, the at least one subsequence is a subsequence, and the subsequence is represented as r(n)=1-2*c( n), n=k,...,k+143.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述同步信号块中包括2个PBCH符号,所述第二资源包括所示2个PBCH符号分别对应的不同部分;In a possible implementation manner, the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
所述网络设备通过所述第二资源发送所述解调参考信号序列,包括:Sending, by the network device, the demodulation reference signal sequence by using the second resource, including:
所述网络设备将所述解调参考信号序列平均分为长度相同的第一子序列和第二子序列;The network device divides the demodulation reference signal sequence into first subsequences and second subsequences of the same length;
所述网络设备将所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列分别映射到所述第二资源的不同部分;The network device maps the first subsequence and the second subsequence to different parts of the second resource respectively;
通过所述第二资源的不同部分发送所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列。The first subsequence and the second subsequence are transmitted by different portions of the second resource.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LFSR的尺寸为31,所述的LFSR初始值为 其中c init=2 m*PCID+1,其中PCID是小区标识,m是小于等于21的自然数, In a possible implementation manner, the size of the LFSR is 31, and the initial value of the LFSR is Where c init = 2 m * PCID+1, where PCID is the cell identifier and m is a natural number less than or equal to 21.
所述两个M序列中的每个M序列的长度为I,I为自然数,I的取值范围是31<I<2 31-1, Each of the two M sequences has a length of I, I is a natural number, and I has a value range of 31<I<2 31 -1.
所述两个M序列中的第一个M序列表示为x 0(n+31)=(x 0(n+3)+x 0(n))mod 2,所述第一个M序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x 31+x 3+1计算出的,n=I-31; The first M sequence of the two M sequences is represented as x 0 (n+31)=(x 0 (n+3)+x 0 (n)) mod 2, and the first M sequence is The LFSR is calculated according to the polynomial x 31 +x 3 +1, n=I-31;
所述两个M序列中的第二个M序列表示为x 1(n+31)=(x 1(n+7)+x 1(n))mod 2,所述第二个M序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x 31+x 7+1计算出的,n=I-31; The second M sequence of the two M sequences is represented as x 1 (n+31)=(x 1 (n+7)+x 1 (n)) mod 2, and the second M sequence is The LFSR is calculated according to the polynomial x 31 +x 7 +1, n=I-31;
所述Gold序列表示为c(n)=(x 0(n+N c)+x 1(n+N c))mod 2,其中N c表示所述循环位移的位数,所述Gold序列的长度为G,N c、G为自然数,且G=I; The Gold sequence is represented as c(n)=(x 0 (n+N c )+x 1 (n+N c )) mod 2, where N c represents the number of bits of the cyclic shift, the Gold sequence The length is G, N c , G is a natural number, and G=I;
所述子序列被截取时的起始位置表示为k 1和k 2, k 2=N c-k 1+1,其中SS idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示。 The starting positions when the subsequences are intercepted are denoted as k 1 and k 2 , k 2 = N c - k 1 +1, where SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,I为3344,N c为3200,G为3344,所述至少一个子序列为两个子序列,所述至少一个子序列中的第一子序列表示为r 1(n)=1-2*c(n),n=k 1,...,k 1+71,所述至少一个子序列中的第二子序列表示为r 2(n)=1-2*c(n),n=k 2,...,k 2+71。 In a possible implementation manner, I is 3344, N c is 3200, G is 3344, the at least one subsequence is two subsequences, and the first subsequence in the at least one subsequence is represented as r 1 ( n)=1-2*c(n), n=k 1 , . . . , k 1 +71, the second subsequence of the at least one subsequence is represented as r 2 (n)=1-2* c(n), n=k 2 ,..., k 2 +71.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述同步信号块中包括2个PBCH符号,所述第二资源包括所示2个PBCH符号分别对应的不同部分;In a possible implementation manner, the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
所述网络设备通过所述第二资源发送所述解调参考信号序列,包括:Sending, by the network device, the demodulation reference signal sequence by using the second resource, including:
所述网络设备将所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列分别映射到所述第二资源的不同部分;The network device maps the first subsequence and the second subsequence to different parts of the second resource respectively;
通过所述第二资源的不同部分发送所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列。The first subsequence and the second subsequence are transmitted by different portions of the second resource.
第六方面,提供了一种传输同步信号的方法,包括In a sixth aspect, a method of transmitting a synchronization signal is provided, including
终端设备获得待选序列集合,所述待选序列集合中包括多个待选序列,所述多个待选 序列中的一个待选序列的生成过程包括:根据LFSR生成两个M序列;对所述两个M序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列;从所述Gold序列中截取至少一段子序列作为所述解调参考信号序列,所述子序列被截取时的起始位置是根据指示信息中的部分信息对应的取值集合中的一种取值确定的,所述指示信息用以指示同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序;The terminal device obtains a set of candidate sequences, where the set of candidate sequences includes a plurality of candidate sequences, and a process of generating one of the plurality of candidate sequences includes: generating two M sequences according to the LFSR; The two M sequences are cyclically shifted and added to generate a Gold sequence; at least one subsequence is intercepted from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence, and the starting position of the subsequence is intercepted according to And determining, by the value of the value set corresponding to the partial information in the indication information, the indication information is used to indicate the ordering of the synchronization signal block in the pulse group of the synchronization signal to which the synchronization signal is located;
所述终端设备检测到网络设备发送的解调参考信号;The terminal device detects a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device;
所述终端设备从所述待选序列集合中选择出与所述解调参考信号相关性最高的一个待选序列;The terminal device selects, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal;
所述终端设备根据所述选择出的待选序列,确定生成所述选择出的待选序列时用以确定子序列被截取时的起始位置的部分信息。The terminal device determines, according to the selected candidate sequence, part of the information when the selected candidate sequence is generated to determine a starting position when the subsequence is intercepted.
第七方面,提供了一种网络设备,包括收发器和处理器,其中In a seventh aspect, a network device is provided, including a transceiver and a processor, wherein
所述处理器,用于生成同步信号块以及用以确定所述同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序的指示信息,所述同步信号块包括物理广播信道PBCH符号;The processor is configured to generate a synchronization signal block and the indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set, where the synchronization signal block includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH symbol;
根据线性反馈位移寄存器LFSR生成两个M序列;Generating two M sequences according to the linear feedback shift register LFSR;
对所述两个M序列进行循环位移,生成一个Gold序列;Cyclic shifting the two M sequences to generate a Gold sequence;
从所述Gold序列中截取至少一段子序列作为所述解调参考信号序列,所述子序列被截取时的起始位置是根据所述部分信息确定的,所述解调参考信号序列用于对所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中传输的信号进行解调,Extracting at least one subsequence from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence, the starting position when the subsequence is truncated is determined according to the partial information, and the demodulation reference signal sequence is used for Demodulating a signal transmitted in a time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping,
所述时频资源中包括第一资源和第二资源;The time-frequency resource includes a first resource and a second resource;
所述收发器,用于通过所述第一资源发送主信息块MIB以及所述指示信息中除所述部分信息的之外的其余信息;通过所述第二资源发送所述解调参考信号序列。The transceiver is configured to send, by using the first resource, a primary information block MIB and remaining information of the indication information except the partial information; and sending, by using the second resource, the demodulation reference signal sequence .
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LFSR的尺寸为31,所述的LFSR初始值为 其中c init=2 m*PCID+1,其中PCID是小区标识,m是小于等于21的自然数, In a possible implementation manner, the size of the LFSR is 31, and the initial value of the LFSR is Where c init = 2 m * PCID+1, where PCID is the cell identifier and m is a natural number less than or equal to 21.
所述两个M序列中的每个M序列的长度为I,I为自然数,I的取值范围是31<I<2 31-1, Each of the two M sequences has a length of I, I is a natural number, and I has a value range of 31<I<2 31 -1.
所述两个M序列中的第一个M序列表示为x 0(n+31)=(x 0(n+3)+x 0(n))mod 2,所述第一个M序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x 31+x 3+1计算出的,n=I-31; The first M sequence of the two M sequences is represented as x 0 (n+31)=(x 0 (n+3)+x 0 (n)) mod 2, and the first M sequence is The LFSR is calculated according to the polynomial x 31 +x 3 +1, n=I-31;
所述两个M序列中的第二个M序列表示为x 1(n+31)=(x 1(n+7)+x 1(n))mod 2,所述第二个M序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x 31+x 7+1计算出的,n=I-31; The second M sequence of the two M sequences is represented as x 1 (n+31)=(x 1 (n+7)+x 1 (n)) mod 2, and the second M sequence is The LFSR is calculated according to the polynomial x 31 +x 7 +1, n=I-31;
所述Gold序列表示为c(n)=(x 0(n+N c)+x 1(n+N c))mod 2,其中N c表示所述循环位移的位数,所述Gold序列的长度为G,N c、G为自然数,且G=I; The Gold sequence is represented as c(n)=(x 0 (n+N c )+x 1 (n+N c )) mod 2, where N c represents the number of bits of the cyclic shift, the Gold sequence The length is G, N c , G is a natural number, and G=I;
所述子序列被截取时的起始位置表示为k, 其中SS idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示。 The starting position when the subsequence is intercepted is denoted as k, Where SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,I为3344,N c为3200,G为3344,所述至少一个子序列为一个子序列,所述子序列表示为r(n)=1-2*c(n),n=k,...,k+143。 In a possible implementation manner, I is 3344, N c is 3200, G is 3344, the at least one subsequence is a subsequence, and the subsequence is represented as r(n)=1-2*c( n), n=k,...,k+143.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述同步信号块中包括2个PBCH符号,所述第二资源包括所示2个PBCH符号分别对应的不同部分;In a possible implementation manner, the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
所述处理器,还用于将所述解调参考信号序列平均分为长度相同的第一子序列和第二子序列;所述网络设备将所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列分别映射到所述第二资源的不同部分;The processor is further configured to average the demodulated reference signal sequence into a first subsequence and a second subsequence of the same length; the network device uses the first subsequence and the second subsequence Mapping to different portions of the second resource, respectively;
所述收发器,用于通过所述第二资源的不同部分发送所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列。The transceiver is configured to send the first subsequence and the second subsequence through different parts of the second resource.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LFSR的尺寸为31,所述的LFSR初始值为 其中c init=2 m*PCID+1,其中PCID是小区标识,m是小于等于21的自然数, In a possible implementation manner, the size of the LFSR is 31, and the initial value of the LFSR is Where c init = 2 m * PCID+1, where PCID is the cell identifier and m is a natural number less than or equal to 21.
所述两个M序列中的每个M序列的长度为I,I为自然数,I的取值范围是31<I<2 31-1, Each of the two M sequences has a length of I, I is a natural number, and I has a value range of 31<I<2 31 -1.
所述两个M序列中的第一个M序列表示为x 0(n+31)=(x 0(n+3)+x 0(n))mod 2,所述第一个M序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x 31+x 3+1计算出的,n=I-31; The first M sequence of the two M sequences is represented as x 0 (n+31)=(x 0 (n+3)+x 0 (n)) mod 2, and the first M sequence is The LFSR is calculated according to the polynomial x 31 +x 3 +1, n=I-31;
所述两个M序列中的第二个M序列表示为x 1(n+31)=(x 1(n+7)+x 1(n))mod 2,所述第二个M序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x 31+x 7+1计算出的,n=I-31; The second M sequence of the two M sequences is represented as x 1 (n+31)=(x 1 (n+7)+x 1 (n)) mod 2, and the second M sequence is The LFSR is calculated according to the polynomial x 31 +x 7 +1, n=I-31;
所述Gold序列表示为c(n)=(x 0(n+N c)+x 1(n+N c))mod 2,其中N c表示所述循环位移的位数,所述Gold序列的长度为G,N c、G为自然数,且G=I; The Gold sequence is represented as c(n)=(x 0 (n+N c )+x 1 (n+N c )) mod 2, where N c represents the number of bits of the cyclic shift, the Gold sequence The length is G, N c , G is a natural number, and G=I;
所述子序列被截取时的起始位置表示为k 1和k 2, k 2=N c-k 1+1,其中SS idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示。 The starting positions when the subsequences are intercepted are denoted as k 1 and k 2 , k 2 = N c - k 1 +1, where SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,I为3344,N c为3200,G为3344,所述至少一个子序列为两个子序列,所述至少一个子序列中的第一子序列表示为r 1(n)=1-2*c(n),n=k 1,...,k 1+71,所述至少一个子序列中的第二子序列表示为r 2(n)=1-2*c(n),n=k 2,...,k 2+71。 In a possible implementation manner, I is 3344, N c is 3200, G is 3344, the at least one subsequence is two subsequences, and the first subsequence in the at least one subsequence is represented as r 1 ( n)=1-2*c(n), n=k 1 , . . . , k 1 +71, the second subsequence of the at least one subsequence is represented as r 2 (n)=1-2* c(n), n=k 2 ,..., k 2 +71.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述同步信号块中包括2个PBCH符号,所述第二资源包括所示2个PBCH符号分别对应的不同部分;In a possible implementation manner, the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
所述处理器,还用于将所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列分别映射到所述第二资源的不同部分;The processor is further configured to map the first sub-sequence and the second sub-sequence to different parts of the second resource, respectively;
所述收发器,用于通过所述第二资源的不同部分发送所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列。The transceiver is configured to send the first subsequence and the second subsequence through different parts of the second resource.
第八方面,提供了一种终端设备,包括收发器和处理器,其中In an eighth aspect, a terminal device is provided, including a transceiver and a processor, wherein
所述处理器,获得待选序列集合,所述待选序列集合中包括多个待选序列,所述多个待选序列中的一个待选序列的生成过程包括:根据LFSR生成两个M序列;对所述两个M序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列;从所述Gold序列中截取至少一段子序列作为所述解调参考信号序列,所述子序列被截取时的起始位置是根据指示信息中的部分信息对应的取值集合中的一种取值确定的,所述指示信息用以指示同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序;The processor obtains a set of candidate sequences, where the set of candidate sequences includes a plurality of candidate sequences, and a process of generating one of the plurality of candidate sequences includes: generating two M sequences according to the LFSR And cyclically shifting the two M sequences to generate a Gold sequence; and extracting at least one subsequence from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence, the start of the subsequence being intercepted The location is determined according to one of the value sets corresponding to the partial information in the indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the ordering of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set;
所述收发器,用于检测到网络设备发送的解调参考信号;The transceiver is configured to detect a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device;
所述处理器,还用于从所述待选序列集合中选择出与所述解调参考信号相关性最高的一个待选序列;The processor is further configured to select, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal;
根据所述选择出的待选序列,确定生成所述选择出的待选序列时用以确定子序列被截取时的起始位置的部分信息。And determining, according to the selected candidate sequence, partial information for determining a starting position when the selected sequence is to be intercepted when the selected candidate sequence is generated.
第九方面,提供了一种传输同步信号的方法,包括:In a ninth aspect, a method for transmitting a synchronization signal is provided, including:
网络设备生成同步信号块以及用以确定所述同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序的指示信息,所述同步信号块包括物理广播信道PBCH符号;The network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining an order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set, the synchronization signal block including a physical broadcast channel PBCH symbol;
所述网络设备根据线性反馈位移寄存器LFSR生成至少一组输出序列,所述至少一组输 出序列中的每组输出序列中包括两个输出序列;The network device generates at least one set of output sequences according to a linear feedback shift register LFSR, wherein each of the at least one set of output sequences includes two output sequences;
所述网络设备分别对每组所述输出序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个对应的Gold序列,从而获得至少一个Gold序列,所述循环位移的位数是根据所述部分信息确定的;The network device respectively cyclically shifts each set of the output sequences to generate a corresponding Gold sequence, thereby obtaining at least one Gold sequence, and the number of bits of the cyclic shift is determined according to the partial information;
所述网络设备根据所述至少一个Gold序列中的每个所述Gold序列,分别生成一个所述解调参考信号序列,所述解调参考信号序列用于对所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中传输的信号进行解调,Generating, by the network device, one demodulation reference signal sequence according to each of the at least one Gold sequence, the demodulation reference signal sequence being used for time-frequency resources mapped to the PBCH symbol The signal transmitted in the medium is demodulated,
所述时频资源中包括第一资源和第二资源;The time-frequency resource includes a first resource and a second resource;
所述网络设备通过所述第一资源发送主信息块MIB以及所述指示信息中除所述部分信息的之外的其余信息;和Transmitting, by the network device, the primary information block MIB and the remaining information of the indication information except the partial information by using the first resource; and
所述网络设备通过所述第二资源发送所述解调参考信号序列。The network device transmits the demodulation reference signal sequence by using the second resource.
在本申请实施例提供的解调参考信号序列的生成方法中,网络设备利用一个LFSR,根据预定初始值生成至少一组输出序列(输出序列可以是LFSR直接生成的M序列,也可以是基于LFSR直接生成的M序列循环补足后得到的另一序列),继而对每组输出序列进行循环位移后相加得到一个Gold序列,从而得到至少一个Gold序列,其中循环位移的位数是根据所述指示信息中的部分信息确定的,从而使得根据M序列生成的Gold序列、以及从Gold序列中截取的解调参考信号序列与所述部分信息是唯一对应的。通过这种方式将部分信息以隐式的方式携带在解调参考信号序列中,而不是将指示信息全部以显示的方式通过PBCH发送,从而减少了在PBCH中传输的数据量,节约了PBCH的时频资源。In the method for generating a demodulation reference signal sequence provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device uses an LFSR to generate at least one set of output sequences according to a predetermined initial value (the output sequence may be an M sequence directly generated by the LFSR, or may be based on the LFSR. Another sequence obtained after the directly generated M sequence is complemented, and then cyclically shifting each set of output sequences to add a Gold sequence, thereby obtaining at least one Gold sequence, wherein the number of bits of the cyclic shift is according to the indication Part of the information in the information is determined such that the Gold sequence generated from the M sequence, and the demodulation reference signal sequence intercepted from the Gold sequence, uniquely correspond to the partial information. In this way, part of the information is carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner, instead of transmitting the indication information through the PBCH in a manner of being displayed, thereby reducing the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH and saving the PBCH. Time-frequency resources.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述至少一组输出序列为一组M序列,所述LFSR的尺寸为31,In a possible implementation manner, the at least one set of output sequences is a set of M sequences, and the size of the LFSR is 31.
所述的LFSR初始值为c init, 其中c init=2 m*PCID+1,其中PCID是小区标识,m是小于等于21的自然数, The initial value of the LFSR is c init , Where c init = 2 m * PCID+1, where PCID is the cell identifier and m is a natural number less than or equal to 21.
所述一组M序列中包含的两个M序列中的每个M序列的长度为I,I为自然数,I的取值范围是31<I<2 31-1, Each of the two M sequences included in the set of M sequences has a length of I, I is a natural number, and I has a value range of 31<I<2 31 -1,
所述一组M序列中的第一个M序列表示为x
0(n+31)=(x
0(n+3)+x
0(n))mod 2,所述第一个M序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
31+x
3+1计算出的,n=I-31;
The first M sequence in the set of M sequences is represented as x 0 (n+31)=(x 0 (n+3)+x 0 (n))
所述两个M序列中的第二个M序列表示为x
1(n+31)=(x
1(n+7)+x
1(n))mod 2,所述第二个M序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
31+x
7+1计算出的,n=I-31;
The second M sequence of the two M sequences is represented as x 1 (n+31)=(x 1 (n+7)+x 1 (n))
所述Gold序列表示为c(n)=(x
0(n+N
c)+x
1(n+N
c))mod 2,其中N
c表示所述循环位移的位数,所述Gold序列的长度为G,N
c、G为自然数,且G=I,其中N
c=3200*(SS
idx+1),其中SS
idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示。
The Gold sequence is represented as c(n)=(x 0 (n+N c )+x 1 (n+N c ))
在一种可能的实现方式中,I为3344,所述解调参考信号是从所述Gold序列中截取的,所述解调参考信号表示为r(n)=1-2*c(n),n=1,...,144。In a possible implementation manner, I is 3344, and the demodulation reference signal is intercepted from the Gold sequence, and the demodulation reference signal is represented as r(n)=1-2*c(n) , n=1,...,144.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述至少一组输出序列为一组输出序列,所述LFSR的尺寸为7,所述一组输出序列中的每个输出序列的长度为144,In a possible implementation manner, the at least one set of output sequences is a set of output sequences, the size of the LFSR is 7, and each output sequence of the set of output sequences has a length of 144.
所述一组输出序列中的第一输出序列表示为x
0(n+7)=(x
0(n+3)+x
0(n))mod 2,所述第一输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
7+x
3+1计算出的,所述LFSR生成所述第一输出序列时的初始值为x
0(1)~x
0(6)=0,x
0(7)=1,n=I-7;
A first output sequence of the set of output sequences is represented as x 0 (n+7)=(x 0 (n+3)+x 0 (n))
所述一组输出序列中的第二输出序列表示为x
1(n+7)=(x
1(n+1)+x
1(n))mod 2,所述第二输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
7+x+1计算出的,所述LFSR生成所述第一输出序列时的初始值为x
1(1)~x
1(6)=0,x
1(7)=1,n=I-7;
A second output sequence of the set of output sequences is represented as x 1 (n+7)=(x 1 (n+1)+x 1 (n))
所述Gold序列表示为c(n)=(x
0(n+i
1)+x
1(n+i
2))mod 2,其中(i
1,i
2)表示循环位移时的位数,其中
i
2=(SS
idx mod 2)+(NID1 mod 112),PCID=3*NID1+NID2,其中i
1为生成所述Gold序列时对所述第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i
2为生成所述Gold序列时对所述第二输出序列进行循环位移的位数,PCID是小区标识,SS
idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示,NID1的取值范围是0,1,…335,NID2的取值范围是0,1,2;
The Gold sequence is expressed as c(n)=(x 0 (n+i 1 )+x 1 (n+i 2 ))
所述解调参考信号序列表示为r(n)=1-2*c(n)。The demodulation reference signal sequence is represented as r(n) = 1-2 * c(n).
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述至少一组输出序列为一组输出序列,所述LFSR的尺寸为7,所述一组输出序列中的每个输出序列的长度为144,In a possible implementation manner, the at least one set of output sequences is a set of output sequences, the size of the LFSR is 7, and each output sequence of the set of output sequences has a length of 144.
所述一组输出序列中的第一输出序列表示为x
0(n+7)=(x
0(n+3)+x
0(n))mod 2,所述第一输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
7+x
3+1计算出的,所述LFSR生成所述第一输出序列时的初始值为x
0(1)~x
0(6)=0,x
0(7)=1,n=I-7;
A first output sequence of the set of output sequences is represented as x 0 (n+7)=(x 0 (n+3)+x 0 (n))
所述一组输出序列中的第二输出序列表示为x
1(n+7)=(x
1(n+1)+x
1(n))mod 2,所述第二输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
7+x+1计算出的,所述LFSR生成所述第一输出序列时的初始值为x
1(1)~x
1(6)=0,x
1(7)=1,n=I-7;
A second output sequence of the set of output sequences is represented as x 1 (n+7)=(x 1 (n+1)+x 1 (n))
所述Gold序列表示为c(n)=(x
0(n+i
1)+x
1(n+i
2))mod 2,其中(i
1,i
2)表示循环位移时的位数,其中i
1为生成所述Gold序列时对所述第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i
2为生成所述Gold序列时对所述第二输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i
1和/或i
2中的取值分别与SS
idx具有映射关系,SS
idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示;
The Gold sequence is expressed as c(n)=(x 0 (n+i 1 )+x 1 (n+i 2 ))
所述解调参考信号序列表示为r(n)=1-2*c(n)。The demodulation reference signal sequence is represented as r(n) = 1-2 * c(n).
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述同步信号块中包括2个PBCH符号,所述第二资源包括所示2个PBCH符号分别对应的不同部分;In a possible implementation manner, the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
所述网络设备通过所述第二资源发送所述解调参考信号序列,包括:Sending, by the network device, the demodulation reference signal sequence by using the second resource, including:
所述网络设备将所述解调参考信号序列平均分为长度相同的第一子序列和第二子序列;The network device divides the demodulation reference signal sequence into first subsequences and second subsequences of the same length;
所述网络设备将所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列分别映射到所述第二资源的不同部分;The network device maps the first subsequence and the second subsequence to different parts of the second resource respectively;
通过所述第二资源的不同部分发送所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列。The first subsequence and the second subsequence are transmitted by different portions of the second resource.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述至少一组输出序列为两组输出序列,所述LFSR的尺寸为6,所述两组输出序列中的每个输出序列的长度为72,In a possible implementation manner, the at least one set of output sequences is two sets of output sequences, the size of the LFSR is 6, and each of the two sets of output sequences has a length of 72,
所述两组输出序列中的第一组输出序列中的第一输出序列表示为x 0(n+6)=(x 0(n+5)+x 0(n))mod 2,所述第一输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x 6+x 5+1生成的,所述LFSR生成所述第一输出序列时的初始值为x 0(1)~x 0(5)=0,x 0(6)=1,n=I-6; A first output sequence of the first set of output sequences of the two sets of output sequences is represented as x 0 (n+6)=(x 0 (n+5)+x 0 (n)) mod 2, the first An output sequence is generated by the LFSR according to a polynomial x 6 +x 5 +1, and the initial value of the LFSR when generating the first output sequence is x 0 (1) to x 0 (5)=0, x 0 (6)=1, n=I-6;
所述第一组输出序列中的第二输出序列表示为x 0(n+6)=(x 0(n+1)+x 0(n))mod 2,所述第第二输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x 6+x+1生成的,所述LFSR生成所述第二输出序列时的初始值为x 0(1)~x 0(5)=0,x 0(6)=1,n=I-6; The second output sequence in the first set of output sequences is represented as x 0 (n+6)=(x 0 (n+1)+x 0 (n)) mod 2, and the second output sequence is The LFSR is generated according to a polynomial x 6 +x+1, and the initial value of the LFSR when generating the second output sequence is x 0 (1) ~ x 0 (5) = 0, x 0 (6) = 1, n=I-6;
所述两组输出序列中的第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列表示为x 0-(n+6)=(x 0-(n+1)+x 0-(n))mod 2,所述第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x 6+x+1生成的,所述LFSR生成所述第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列时的初始值为x 0-(1)~x 0-(5)=0,x 0-(6)=1,n=I-6; A first output sequence of the second set of output sequences of the two sets of output sequences is represented as x 0- (n+6)=(x 0- (n+1)+x 0- (n)) mod 2, The first output sequence in the second set of output sequences is generated by the LFSR according to a polynomial x 6 +x+1, and the initial value when the LFSR generates the first output sequence in the second set of output sequences x 0- (1) ~ x 0- (5) = 0, x 0 - (6) = 1, n = I-6;
所述第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列表示为x 0-(n+6)=(x 0-(n+5)+x 0-(n+3)+x 0-(n+2)+x 0-(n))mod 2,所述第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x 6+x 5+x 3+x 2+1生成的,所述LFSR生成所述第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列时的初始值为x 0-(1)~x 0-(5)=0,x 0-(6)=1,n=I-6; The second output sequence in the second set of output sequences is represented as x 0- (n+6)=(x 0- (n+5)+x 0- (n+3)+x 0- (n+2 +x 0- (n)) mod 2, the second output sequence in the second set of output sequences is generated by the LFSR according to a polynomial x 6 +x 5 +x 3 +x 2 +1, the LFSR The initial value when generating the second output sequence in the second set of output sequences is x 0 - (1) ~ x 0 - (5) = 0, x 0 - (6) = 1, n = I-6;
所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列表示为c 1(n)=(x 0(n+i 1)+x 1(n+i 2))mod 2,(i 1,i 2)表示生成所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列时循环位移时的位数,其中i 1为生成所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第一组输出序列中的第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i 2为生成所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第一组输出序列中的第二输出序列进行循环位移的位数, i 2=(SS idx1mod 2)+(NID1 mod 112),PCID=3*NID1+NID2, The Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences is represented as c 1 (n)=(x 0 (n+i 1 )+x 1 (n+i 2 )) mod 2, and (i 1 , i 2 ) represents generation a number of bits in a cyclic shift of the Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences, wherein i 1 is a first output sequence in the first set of output sequences when generating a Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences The number of bits of the cyclic shift, i 2 is the number of bits of the second output sequence in the first set of output sequences when the Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences is generated, i 2 =(SS idx1 mod 2)+(NID1 mod 112), PCID=3*NID1+NID2,
所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列表示为c 2(n)=(x 0-(n+i 1-)+x 1-(n+i 2-))mod 2,(i 1-,i 2-)表示生成所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列时循环位移时的位数,其中i 1-为生成所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i 2-为生成所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列进行循环位移的位数, The Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences is represented as c 2 (n)=(x 0- (n+i 1- )+x 1- (n+i 2- )) mod 2, (i 1- , i 2- ) represents the number of bits in the cyclic shift when generating the Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences, where i 1 - is the second set of outputs when generating the Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences a number of bits of the first output sequence in the sequence that are cyclically shifted, i 2 - a bit that cyclically shifts the second output sequence of the second set of output sequences when the Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences is generated number,
i 2-=(SS idx2mod 2)+(NID1 mod 112), i 2- =(SS idx2 mod 2)+(NID1 mod 112),
PCID是小区标识,SS idx=SS idx1+SS idx2,SS idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示,NID1的取值范围是0,1,…335,NID2的取值范围是0,1,2; The PCID is a cell identifier, SS idx = SS idx1 + SS idx2 , SS idx is a decimal representation of the partial information, the value range of NID1 is 0, 1, ... 335, and the value range of NID2 is 0, 1, 2;
根据所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列表示为r 1(n)=1-2*c 1(n); Demodulating reference signal sequence generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences is represented as r 1 (n)=1-2*c 1 (n);
根据所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列表示为r 2(n)=1-2*c 2(n)。 The demodulation reference signal sequence generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences is represented as r 2 (n)=1-2*c 2 (n).
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述至少一组输出序列为两组输出序列,所述LFSR的尺寸为6,所述两组输出序列中的每个输出序列的长度为72,In a possible implementation manner, the at least one set of output sequences is two sets of output sequences, the size of the LFSR is 6, and each of the two sets of output sequences has a length of 72,
所述两组输出序列中的第一组输出序列中的第一输出序列表示为x
0(n+6)=(x
0(n+5)+x
0(n))mod 2,所述第一输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
6+x
5+1生成的,所述LFSR生成所述第一输出序列时的初始值为x
0(1)~x
0(5)=0,x
0(6)=1,n=I-6;
A first output sequence of the first set of output sequences of the two sets of output sequences is represented as x 0 (n+6)=(x 0 (n+5)+x 0 (n))
所述第一组输出序列中的第二输出序列表示为x
0(n+6)=(x
0(n+1)+x
0(n))mod 2,所述第二输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
6+x+1生成的,所述LFSR生成所述第二输出序列时的初始值为x
0(1)~x
0(5)=0,x
0(6)=1,n=I-6;
The second output sequence in the first set of output sequences is represented as x 0 (n+6)=(x 0 (n+1)+x 0 (n))
所述两组输出序列中的第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列表示为x
0-(n+6)=(x
0-(n+1)+x
0-(n))mod 2,所述第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
6+x+1生成的,所述LFSR生成所述第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列时的初始值为x
0-(1)~x
0-(5)=0,x
0-(6)=1,n=I-6;
A first output sequence of the second set of output sequences of the two sets of output sequences is represented as x 0- (n+6)=(x 0- (n+1)+x 0- (n))
所述第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列表示为x
0-(n+6)=(x
0-(n+5)+x
0-(n+3)+x
0-(n+2)+x
0-(n))mod 2,所述第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
6+x
5+x
3+x
2+1生成的,所述LFSR生成所述第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列时的初始值为x
0-(1)~x
0-(5)=0,x
0-(6)=1,n=I-6;
The second output sequence in the second set of output sequences is represented as x 0- (n+6)=(x 0- (n+5)+x 0- (n+3)+x 0- (n+2 +x 0- (n))
所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列表示为c
1(n)=(x
0(n+i
1)+x
1(n+i
2))mod 2,(i
1,i
2)表示生成所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列时循环位移时的位数,其中i
1为生成所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第一组输出序列中的第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i
2为生成所述第一组输出序列对应Gold序列时对所述第一组输出序列中的第二输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i
1和/或i
2的取值分别与SS
idx1具有映射关系,
The Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences is represented as c 1 (n)=(x 0 (n+i 1 )+x 1 (n+i 2 ))
所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列表示为c
2(n)=(x
0-(n+i
1-)+x
1-(n+i
2-))mod 2,(i
1-,i
2-)表示生成所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列时循环位移时的位数,其中i
1-为生成所述第二组M序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i
2-为生成所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i
1-和/或i
2-的取值分别与SS
idx2具有映射关系,SS
idx=SS
idx1+SS
idx2,SS
idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示;
The Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences is represented as c 2 (n)=(x 0- (n+i 1- )+x 1- (n+i 2- ))
根据所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列表示为r 1(n)=1-2*c 1(n); Demodulating reference signal sequence generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences is represented as r 1 (n)=1-2*c 1 (n);
根据所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列表示为r 2(n)=1-2*c 2(n)。 The demodulation reference signal sequence generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences is represented as r 2 (n)=1-2*c 2 (n).
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述同步信号块中包括2个PBCH符号,所述第二资源包括所示2个PBCH符号分别对应的不同部分;In a possible implementation manner, the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
所述网络设备通过所述第二资源发送所述解调参考信号序列,包括:Sending, by the network device, the demodulation reference signal sequence by using the second resource, including:
所述网络设备将所述根据所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列r 1(n)、以及根据所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列r 2(n)分别映射到所述第二资源的不同部分; Demodulating reference signal sequence r 1 (n) generated by the network device according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the first group of output sequences, and demodulation reference generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the second group of output sequences Signal sequences r 2 (n) are mapped to different portions of the second resource, respectively;
通过所述第二资源的不同部分发送所述根据所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列r 1(n)和根据所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列r 2(n)。 Transmitting, by using different parts of the second resource, the demodulation reference signal sequence r 1 (n) generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the first group of output sequences and generating a Gold sequence corresponding to the second group of output sequences Demodulation reference signal sequence r 2 (n).
第十方面,提供了一种传输同步信号的方法,包括In a tenth aspect, a method of transmitting a synchronization signal is provided, including
终端设备获得待选序列集合,所述待选序列集合中包括多个待选序列,所述多个待选序列中的一个待选序列的生成过程包括:根据LFSR生成两个M序列;根据LFSR生成至少一组输出序列,所述至少一组输出序列中的每组输出序列中包括两个输出序列;分别对每组所述输出序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列,从而获得至少一个Gold序列,所述循环位移的位数是根据指示信息中的部分信息对应的取值集合中的一种取值确定的,所述指示信息用以指示同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序;根据所述至少一个Gold序列中的每个所述Gold序列,分别生成一个所述解调参考信号序列;The terminal device obtains a set of candidate sequences, where the set of candidate sequences includes a plurality of candidate sequences, and a process of generating one of the plurality of candidate sequences includes: generating two M sequences according to the LFSR; Generating at least one set of output sequences, each of the at least one set of output sequences comprising two output sequences; each set of the output sequences is cyclically shifted and then added to generate a Gold sequence, thereby obtaining at least a Gold sequence, the number of bits of the cyclic shift is determined according to one of a set of values corresponding to the partial information in the indication information, the indication information is used to indicate that the synchronization signal block is in the pulse group of the synchronization signal to which it belongs. Sorting; generating, according to each of the Gold sequences in the at least one Gold sequence, one of the demodulation reference signal sequences;
所述终端设备检测到网络设备发送的解调参考信号;The terminal device detects a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device;
所述终端设备从所述待选序列集合中选择出与所述解调参考信号相关性最高的一个待选序列;The terminal device selects, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal;
所述终端设备根据所述选择出的待选序列,确定生成所述选择出的待选序列时用以确定循环位移的位数的部分信息。And determining, by the terminal device, part of information for determining a number of bits of the cyclic shift when the selected candidate sequence is generated according to the selected candidate sequence.
第十一方面,提供了一种网络设备,包括收发器和处理器,其中In an eleventh aspect, a network device is provided, including a transceiver and a processor, wherein
所述处理器,用于生成同步信号块以及用以确定所述同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序的指示信息,所述同步信号块包括物理广播信道PBCH符号;The processor is configured to generate a synchronization signal block and the indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set, where the synchronization signal block includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH symbol;
根据线性反馈位移寄存器LFSR生成至少一组输出序列,所述至少一组输出序列中的每组输出序列中包括两个输出序列;Generating at least one set of output sequences according to a linear feedback shift register LFSR, each of the at least one set of output sequences comprising two output sequences;
对每组所述输出序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个对应的Gold序列,从而获得至少一个Gold序列,所述循环位移的位数是根据所述部分信息确定的;Performing cyclic shifting on each of the sets of output sequences to generate a corresponding Gold sequence, thereby obtaining at least one Gold sequence, and the number of bits of the cyclic shift is determined according to the partial information;
根据所述至少一个Gold序列中的每个所述Gold序列,分别生成一个所述解调参考信号序列,所述解调参考信号序列用于对所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中传输的信号进行解调,Generating, according to each of the Gold sequences in the at least one Gold sequence, a demodulation reference signal sequence, where the demodulation reference signal sequence is used to transmit a signal in a time-frequency resource mapped to the PBCH symbol Demodulation,
所述时频资源中包括第一资源和第二资源;The time-frequency resource includes a first resource and a second resource;
所述收发器,用于通过所述第一资源发送主信息块MIB以及所述指示信息中除所述部分信息的之外的其余信息;和通过所述第二资源发送所述解调参考信号序列。The transceiver is configured to send, by using the first resource, a primary information block MIB and remaining information of the indication information except the partial information; and send the demodulation reference signal by using the second resource. sequence.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述至少一组M序列为一组M序列,所述LFSR的尺寸为31,In a possible implementation manner, the at least one set of M sequences is a set of M sequences, and the size of the LFSR is 31.
所述的LFSR初始值为c init, 其中c init=2 m*PCID+1,其中PCID是小区标识,m是小于等于21的自然数, The initial value of the LFSR is c init , Where c init = 2 m * PCID+1, where PCID is the cell identifier and m is a natural number less than or equal to 21.
所述一组M序列中包含的两个M序列中的每个M序列的长度为I,I为自然数,I的取值范围是31<I<2 31-1, Each of the two M sequences included in the set of M sequences has a length of I, I is a natural number, and I has a value range of 31<I<2 31 -1,
所述一组M序列中的第一个M序列表示为x
0(n+31)=(x
0(n+3)+x
0(n))mod 2,所述第一个M序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
31+x
3+1计算出的,n=I-31;
The first M sequence in the set of M sequences is represented as x 0 (n+31)=(x 0 (n+3)+x 0 (n))
所述两个M序列中的第二个M序列表示为x
1(n+31)=(x
1(n+7)+x
1(n))mod 2,所述第二个M序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
31+x
7+1计算出的,n=I-31;
The second M sequence of the two M sequences is represented as x 1 (n+31)=(x 1 (n+7)+x 1 (n))
所述Gold序列表示为c(n)=(x
0(n+N
c)+x
1(n+N
c))mod 2,其中N
c表示所述循环位移的位数,所述Gold序列的长度为G,N
c、G为自然数,且G=I,其中N
c=3200*(SS
idx+1)。
The Gold sequence is represented as c(n)=(x 0 (n+N c )+x 1 (n+N c ))
在一种可能的实现方式中,I为144,所述解调参考信号是从所述Gold序列中截取的,所述解调参考信号表示为r(n)=1-2*c(n),n=1,...,144。In a possible implementation manner, I is 144, and the demodulation reference signal is intercepted from the Gold sequence, and the demodulation reference signal is represented as r(n)=1-2*c(n) , n=1,...,144.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述至少一组输出序列为一组输出序列,所述LFSR的尺寸为7,所述一组输出序列中的每个输出序列的长度为144,In a possible implementation manner, the at least one set of output sequences is a set of output sequences, the size of the LFSR is 7, and each output sequence of the set of output sequences has a length of 144.
所述一组输出序列中的第一输出序列表示为x
0(n+7)=(x
0(n+3)+x
0(n))mod 2,所述第一输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
7+x
3+1计算出的,所述LFSR生成所述第一输出序列时的初始值为x
0(1)~x
0(6)=0,x
0(7)=1,n=I-7;
A first output sequence of the set of output sequences is represented as x 0 (n+7)=(x 0 (n+3)+x 0 (n))
所述一组输出序列中的第二输出序列表示为x
1(n+7)=(x
1(n+1)+x
1(n))mod 2,所述第二输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
7+x+1计算出的,所述LFSR生成所述第一输出序列时的初始值为x
1(1)~x
1(6)=0,x
1(7)=1,n=I-7;
A second output sequence of the set of output sequences is represented as x 1 (n+7)=(x 1 (n+1)+x 1 (n))
所述Gold序列表示为c(n)=(x
0(n+i
1)+x
1(n+i
2))mod 2,其中(i
1,i
2)表示循环位移时的位数,其中
i
2=(SS
idx mod 2)+(NID1 mod 112),PCID=3*NID1+NID2,其中i
1为生成所述Gold序列时对所述第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i
2为生成所述Gold序列时对所述第二输出序列进行循环位移的位数,PCID是小区标识,SS
idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示,NID1的取值范围是0,1,…335,NID2的取值范围是0,1,2;
The Gold sequence is expressed as c(n)=(x 0 (n+i 1 )+x 1 (n+i 2 ))
所述解调参考信号序列表示为r(n)=1-2*c(n)。The demodulation reference signal sequence is represented as r(n) = 1-2 * c(n).
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述至少一组输出序列为一组输出序列,所述LFSR的尺寸 为7,所述一组输出序列中的每个输出序列的长度为144,In a possible implementation manner, the at least one set of output sequences is a set of output sequences, the LFSR has a size of 7, and each of the set of output sequences has a length of 144.
所述一组输出序列中的第一输出序列表示为x
0(n+7)=(x
0(n+3)+x
0(n))mod 2,所述第一输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
7+x
3+1计算出的,所述LFSR生成所述第一输出序列时的初始值为x
0(1)~x
0(6)=0,x
0(7)=1,n=I-7;
A first output sequence of the set of output sequences is represented as x 0 (n+7)=(x 0 (n+3)+x 0 (n))
所述一组输出序列中的第二输出序列表示为x
1(n+7)=(x
1(n+1)+x
1(n))mod 2,所述第二输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
7+x+1计算出的,所述LFSR生成所述第一输出序列时的初始值为x
1(1)~x
1(6)=0,x
1(7)=1,n=I-7;
A second output sequence of the set of output sequences is represented as x 1 (n+7)=(x 1 (n+1)+x 1 (n))
所述Gold序列表示为c(n)=(x
0(n+i
1)+x
1(n+i
2))mod 2,其中(i
1,i
2)表示循环位移时的位数,其中i
1为生成所述Gold序列时对所述第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i
2为生成所述Gold序列时对所述第二输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i
1和/或i
2中的取值分别与SS
idx具有映射关系,SS
idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示;
The Gold sequence is expressed as c(n)=(x 0 (n+i 1 )+x 1 (n+i 2 ))
所述解调参考信号序列表示为r(n)=1-2*c(n)。The demodulation reference signal sequence is represented as r(n) = 1-2 * c(n).
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述同步信号块中包括2个PBCH符号,所述第二资源包括所示2个PBCH符号分别对应的不同部分;In a possible implementation manner, the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
所述处理器,还用于将所述解调参考信号序列平均分为长度相同的第一子序列和第二子序列;将所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列分别映射到所述第二资源的不同部分;The processor is further configured to average the demodulated reference signal sequence into a first subsequence and a second subsequence of the same length; mapping the first subsequence and the second subsequence to the Describe the different parts of the second resource;
所述收发器,用于通过所述第二资源的不同部分发送所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列。The transceiver is configured to send the first subsequence and the second subsequence through different parts of the second resource.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述至少一组输出序列为两组输出序列,所述LFSR的尺寸为6,所述两组输出序列中的每个输出序列的长度为72,In a possible implementation manner, the at least one set of output sequences is two sets of output sequences, the size of the LFSR is 6, and each of the two sets of output sequences has a length of 72,
所述两组输出序列中的第一组输出序列中的第一输出序列表示为x 0(n+6)=(x 0(n+5)+x 0(n))mod 2,所述第一输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x 6+x 5+1生成的,所述LFSR生成所述第一输出序列时的初始值为x 0(1)~x 0(5)=0,x 0(6)=1,n=I-6; A first output sequence of the first set of output sequences of the two sets of output sequences is represented as x 0 (n+6)=(x 0 (n+5)+x 0 (n)) mod 2, the first An output sequence is generated by the LFSR according to a polynomial x 6 +x 5 +1, and the initial value of the LFSR when generating the first output sequence is x 0 (1) to x 0 (5)=0, x 0 (6)=1, n=I-6;
所述第一组输出序列中的第二输出序列表示为x 0(n+6)=(x 0(n+1)+x 0(n))mod 2,所述第第二输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x 6+x+1生成的,所述LFSR生成所述第二输出序列时的初始值为x 0(1)~x 0(5)=0,x 0(6)=1,n=I-6; The second output sequence in the first set of output sequences is represented as x 0 (n+6)=(x 0 (n+1)+x 0 (n)) mod 2, and the second output sequence is The LFSR is generated according to a polynomial x 6 +x+1, and the initial value of the LFSR when generating the second output sequence is x 0 (1) ~ x 0 (5) = 0, x 0 (6) = 1, n=I-6;
所述两组输出序列中的第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列表示为x 0-(n+6)=(x 0-(n+1)+x 0-(n))mod 2,所述第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x 6+x+1生成的,所述LFSR生成所述第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列时的初始值为x 0-(1)~x 0-(5)=0,x 0-(6)=1,n=I-6; A first output sequence of the second set of output sequences of the two sets of output sequences is represented as x 0- (n+6)=(x 0- (n+1)+x 0- (n)) mod 2, The first output sequence in the second set of output sequences is generated by the LFSR according to a polynomial x 6 +x+1, and the initial value when the LFSR generates the first output sequence in the second set of output sequences x 0- (1) ~ x 0- (5) = 0, x 0 - (6) = 1, n = I-6;
所述第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列表示为x 0-(n+6)=(x 0-(n+5)+x 0-(n+3)+x 0-(n+2)+x 0-(n))mod 2,所述第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x 6+x 5+x 3+x 2+1生成的,所述LFSR生成所述第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列时的初始值为x 0-(1)~x 0-(5)=0,x 0-(6)=1,n=I-6; The second output sequence in the second set of output sequences is represented as x 0- (n+6)=(x 0- (n+5)+x 0- (n+3)+x 0- (n+2 +x 0- (n)) mod 2, the second output sequence in the second set of output sequences is generated by the LFSR according to a polynomial x 6 +x 5 +x 3 +x 2 +1, the LFSR The initial value when generating the second output sequence in the second set of output sequences is x 0 - (1) ~ x 0 - (5) = 0, x 0 - (6) = 1, n = I-6;
所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列表示为c 1(n)=(x 0(n+i 1)+x 1(n+i 2))mod 2,(i 1,i 2)表示生成所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列时循环位移时的位数,其中i 1为生成所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第一组输出序列中的第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i 2为生成所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第一组输出序列中的第二输出序列进行循环位移的位数, i 2=(SS idx1mod 2)+(NID1 mod 112),PCID=3*NID1+NID2, The Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences is represented as c 1 (n)=(x 0 (n+i 1 )+x 1 (n+i 2 )) mod 2, and (i 1 , i 2 ) represents generation a number of bits in a cyclic shift of the Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences, wherein i 1 is a first output sequence in the first set of output sequences when generating a Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences The number of bits of the cyclic shift, i 2 is the number of bits of the second output sequence in the first set of output sequences when the Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences is generated, i 2 =(SS idx1 mod 2)+(NID1 mod 112), PCID=3*NID1+NID2,
所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列表示为c 2(n)=(x 0-(n+i 1-)+x 1-(n+i 2-))mod 2,(i 1-,i 2-)表示生成所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列时循环位移时的位数,其中i 1-为生成所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i 2-为生成所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列进行循环位移的位数, The Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences is represented as c 2 (n)=(x 0- (n+i 1- )+x 1- (n+i 2- )) mod 2, (i 1- , i 2- ) represents the number of bits in the cyclic shift when generating the Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences, where i 1 - is the second set of outputs when generating the Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences a number of bits of the first output sequence in the sequence that are cyclically shifted, i 2 - a bit that cyclically shifts the second output sequence of the second set of output sequences when the Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences is generated number,
i 2-=(SS idx2mod 2)+(NID1 mod 112), i 2- =(SS idx2 mod 2)+(NID1 mod 112),
PCID是小区标识,SS idx=SS idx1+SS idx2,SS idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示,NID1的取值范围是0,1,…335,NID2的取值范围是0,1,2; The PCID is a cell identifier, SS idx = SS idx1 + SS idx2 , SS idx is a decimal representation of the partial information, the value range of NID1 is 0, 1, ... 335, and the value range of NID2 is 0, 1, 2;
根据所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列表示为r 1(n)=1-2*c 1(n); Demodulating reference signal sequence generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences is represented as r 1 (n)=1-2*c 1 (n);
根据所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列表示为r 2(n)=1-2*c 2(n)。 The demodulation reference signal sequence generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences is represented as r 2 (n)=1-2*c 2 (n).
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述至少一组输出序列为两组输出序列,所述LFSR的尺寸为6,所述两组输出序列中的每个输出序列的长度为72,In a possible implementation manner, the at least one set of output sequences is two sets of output sequences, the size of the LFSR is 6, and each of the two sets of output sequences has a length of 72,
所述两组输出序列中的第一组输出序列中的第一输出序列表示为x
0(n+6)=(x
0(n+5)+x
0(n))mod 2,所述第一输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
6+x
5+1生成的,所述LFSR生成所述第一输出序列时的初始值为x
0(1)~x
0(5)=0,x
0(6)=1,n=I-6;
A first output sequence of the first set of output sequences of the two sets of output sequences is represented as x 0 (n+6)=(x 0 (n+5)+x 0 (n))
所述第一组输出序列中的第二输出序列表示为x
0(n+6)=(x
0(n+1)+x
0(n))mod 2,所述第二输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
6+x+1生成的,所述LFSR生成所述第二输出序列时的初始值为x
0(1)~x
0(5)=0,x
0(6)=1,n=I-6;
The second output sequence in the first set of output sequences is represented as x 0 (n+6)=(x 0 (n+1)+x 0 (n))
所述两组输出序列中的第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列表示为x
0-(n+6)=(x
0-(n+1)+x
0-(n))mod 2,所述第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
6+x+1生成的,所述LFSR生成所述第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列时的初始值为x
0-(1)~x
0-(5)=0,x
0-(6)=1,n=I-6;
A first output sequence of the second set of output sequences of the two sets of output sequences is represented as x 0- (n+6)=(x 0- (n+1)+x 0- (n))
所述第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列表示为x
0-(n+6)=(x
0-(n+5)+x
0-(n+3)+x
0-(n+2)+x
0-(n))mod 2,所述第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列是所述LFSR根据多项式x
6+x
5+x
3+x
2+1生成的,所述LFSR生成所述第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列时的初始值为x
0-(1)~x
0-(5)=0,x
0-(6)=1,n=I-6;
The second output sequence in the second set of output sequences is represented as x 0- (n+6)=(x 0- (n+5)+x 0- (n+3)+x 0- (n+2 +x 0- (n))
所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列表示为c
1(n)=(x
0(n+i
1)+x
1(n+i
2))mod 2,(i
1,i
2)表示生成所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列时循环位移时的位数,其中i
1为生成所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第一组输出序列中的第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i
2为生成所述第一组输出序列对应Gold序列时对所述第一组输出序列中的第二输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i
1和/或i
2的取值分别与SS
idx1具有映射关系,
The Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences is represented as c 1 (n)=(x 0 (n+i 1 )+x 1 (n+i 2 ))
所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列表示为c
2(n)=(x
0-(n+i
1-)+x
1-(n+i
2-))mod 2,(i
1-,i
2-)表示生成所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列时循环位移时的位数,其中i
1-为生成所述第二组M序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i
2-为生成所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i
1-和/或i
2-的取值分别与SS
idx2具有映射关系, SS
idx=SS
idx1+SS
idx2,SS
idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示;
The Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences is represented as c 2 (n)=(x 0- (n+i 1- )+x 1- (n+i 2- ))
根据所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列表示为r 1(n)=1-2*c 1(n); Demodulating reference signal sequence generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences is represented as r 1 (n)=1-2*c 1 (n);
根据所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列表示为r 2(n)=1-2*c 2(n)。 The demodulation reference signal sequence generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences is represented as r 2 (n)=1-2*c 2 (n).
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述同步信号块中包括2个PBCH符号,所述第二资源包括所示2个PBCH符号分别对应的不同部分;In a possible implementation manner, the synchronization signal block includes two PBCH symbols, and the second resource includes different parts corresponding to the two PBCH symbols respectively;
所述网络设备通过所述第二资源发送所述解调参考信号序列,包括:Sending, by the network device, the demodulation reference signal sequence by using the second resource, including:
所述网络设备将所述根据所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列r 1(n)、以及根据所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列r 2(n)分别映射到所述第二资源的不同部分; Demodulating reference signal sequence r 1 (n) generated by the network device according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the first group of output sequences, and demodulation reference generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the second group of output sequences Signal sequences r 2 (n) are mapped to different portions of the second resource, respectively;
通过所述第二资源的不同部分发送所述根据所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列r 1(n)和根据所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列r 2(n)。 Transmitting, by using different parts of the second resource, the demodulation reference signal sequence r 1 (n) generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the first group of output sequences and generating a Gold sequence corresponding to the second group of output sequences Demodulation reference signal sequence r 2 (n).
第十二方面,还提供了一种终端设备,包括收发器和处理器,其中In a twelfth aspect, a terminal device is provided, including a transceiver and a processor, wherein
所述处理器,用于获得待选序列集合,所述待选序列集合中包括多个待选序列,所述多个待选序列中的一个待选序列的生成过程包括:根据LFSR生成两个M序列;根据LFSR生成至少一组输出序列,所述至少一组输出序列中的每组输出序列中包括两个输出序列;分别对每组所述输出序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列,从而获得至少一个Gold序列,所述循环位移的位数是根据指示信息中的部分信息对应的取值集合中的一种取值确定的,所述指示信息用以指示同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序;根据所述至少一个Gold序列中的每个所述Gold序列,分别生成一个所述解调参考信号序列;The processor is configured to obtain a candidate sequence set, where the candidate sequence set includes multiple candidate sequences, and a process of generating one of the multiple candidate sequences includes: generating two according to the LFSR An M sequence; generating at least one set of output sequences according to the LFSR, wherein each of the at least one set of output sequences includes two output sequences; each set of the output sequences is cyclically shifted and then added to generate a Gold Sequence, thereby obtaining at least one Gold sequence, the number of bits of the cyclic shift is determined according to one of a set of values corresponding to the partial information in the indication information, the indication information is used to indicate that the synchronization signal block belongs to Sorting the set of synchronization signal pulses; generating one of the demodulation reference signal sequences respectively according to each of the Gold sequences in the at least one Gold sequence;
所述收发器,用于检测到网络设备发送的解调参考信号;The transceiver is configured to detect a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device;
所述处理器,还用于从所述待选序列集合中选择出与所述解调参考信号相关性最高的一个待选序列;The processor is further configured to select, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal;
根据所述选择出的待选序列,确定生成所述选择出的待选序列时用以确定循环位移的位数的部分信息。And determining, according to the selected candidate sequence, partial information for determining the number of bits of the cyclic shift when the selected candidate sequence is generated.
第十三方面,还提供了一种通信系统,包括上述第三方面或第三方面的任意一种可能的实现方式所述的网络设备,以及第四方面所述的终端设备;或者A thirteenth aspect, further provides a communication system, comprising the network device according to any one of the foregoing third aspect or the third aspect, and the terminal device of the fourth aspect; or
包括上述第七方面或第七方面的任意一种可能的实现方式所述的网络设备,以及第八方面所述的终端设备;或者The network device of any one of the foregoing possible implementations of the seventh aspect or the seventh aspect, and the terminal device of the eighth aspect; or
包括上述第十一方面或第十一方面的任意一种可能的实现方式所述的网络设备,以及第十二方面所述的终端设备。The network device of any one of the possible implementations of the eleventh or eleventh aspect, and the terminal device of the twelfth aspect.
第十四方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述各方面所述的方法。In a fourteenth aspect, a computer readable storage medium is provided having instructions stored therein that, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the methods described in the above aspects.
第十五方面,本申请的又一方面提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述各方面所述的方法。In a fifteenth aspect, a further aspect of the present application provides a computer program product comprising instructions which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform the methods described in the above aspects.
在上述各个方面,以及各个方面的各种可能的实现方式中,所述指示信息为同步信号块时间索引SBTI。In various aspects described above, and various possible implementations of the various aspects, the indication information is a synchronization signal block time index SBTI.
为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例的技术方案,下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作一简单地介绍,显而易见地,下面描述中的附图是本申请的一些实施例,对于本领域普通技术人员来讲,在不付出创造性劳动的前提下,还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the drawings used in the description of the embodiments will be briefly described below. It is obvious that the drawings in the following description are some embodiments of the present application, Those skilled in the art can also obtain other drawings based on these drawings without paying any creative work.
图1为本申请实施例应用的一种网络系统的示意图;1 is a schematic diagram of a network system applied to an embodiment of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的几种可能的同步信号块的结构的示意图;2 is a schematic diagram of structures of several possible synchronization signal blocks provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的传输同步信号的方法的原理流程图;3 is a schematic flowchart of a method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种LFSR的结构示意图;4 is a schematic structural diagram of an LFSR according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种传输同步信号的方法的流程图;FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的另一种传输同步信号的方法的流程图;FIG. 6 is a flowchart of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图7为本申请实施例提供的另一种传输同步信号的方法的流程图;FIG. 7 is a flowchart of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图8为本申请实施例提供的另一种传输同步信号的方法的流程图;FIG. 8 is a flowchart of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图9为本申请实施例提供的另一种传输同步信号的方法的流程图;FIG. 9 is a flowchart of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的另一种传输同步信号的方法的流程图;FIG. 10 is a flowchart of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图11为本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备的结构示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图12为本申请实施例提供的另一种网络设备的结构示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of another network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种终端设备的结构示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图14为本申请实施例提供的一种终端设备的结构示意图。FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
在NR中,规定了在不同载波频率场景下一个SS burst set最多包含的SS block数量,例如在载波频率为0~3GHz场景中,一个SS burst set最多包含4个SS block,在载波频率为3GHz~6GHz场景中,一个SS burst set最多包含8个SS block,在载波频率为6GHz以上场景中,一个SS burst set最多包含64个SS block。为了区分64个SS block,需要使用6bit的数据,因此通信系统设计用以指示一个SS block在所属SS burst set中的排序的信息,例如同步信号块时间索引(SS Block Time Index,SBTI),占用6bit。In NR, the maximum number of SS blocks included in an SS burst set in different carrier frequency scenarios is specified. For example, in a scenario where the carrier frequency is 0 to 3 GHz, an SS burst set includes a maximum of 4 SS blocks at a carrier frequency of 3 GHz. In a ~6 GHz scenario, an SS burst set contains up to eight SS blocks. In a scenario with a carrier frequency of 6 GHz or higher, an SS burst set contains up to 64 SS blocks. In order to distinguish 64 SS blocks, 6 bits of data are needed, so the communication system is designed to indicate the sorting information of an SS block in the SS burst set, such as the SS Block Time Index (SBTI), which is occupied. 6bit.
有些研究提出可以将上述用以指示一个SS block在所属SS burst set中的排序的信息以显示的方式携带在主信息块(Master Information Block,MIB)中,其中MIB通过SS block的PBCH符号映射的部分时频资源传输。然而,由于MIB中还需要携带一些重要且需要频繁发送的参数,如下行系统带宽、物理混合自动重传指示信道(Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel,PHICH)配置、系统帧号(System Frame Number,SFN)等等,因而用以传输MIB的时频资源较为紧缺。如果将指示信息的所有bit全部都携带在用以传输MIB的时频资源中将对依赖MIB实现的其他功能造成影响。为了节省系统分配的用以传输MIB的时频资源,本申请提出利用PBCH对应的时频资源中除MIB占用的时频资源之外的其他传输资源以隐式的方式携带指示信息中的部分信息,这样PBCH对应的时频资源中MIB占用的时频资源只需要携带指示信息中的其余信息,从而减少了需要通过PBCH的时频资源携带的信息量,节约了PBCH的时频资源。Some studies suggest that the above information indicating the ordering of an SS block in the associated SS burst set can be carried in the main information block (MIB) in a display manner, wherein the MIB is mapped by the PBCH symbol of the SS block. Partial time-frequency resource transmission. However, since the MIB also needs to carry some important parameters that need to be frequently sent, the following system bandwidth, Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel (PHICH) configuration, System Frame Number (SFN) And so on, so the time-frequency resources used to transmit the MIB are scarce. If all the bits of the indication information are carried in the time-frequency resources used to transmit the MIB, it will affect other functions that rely on the MIB implementation. In order to save the time-frequency resources allocated by the system for transmitting the MIB, the present application proposes to use the transmission resources other than the time-frequency resources occupied by the MIB in the time-frequency resources corresponding to the PBCH to carry part of the information in the indication information in an implicit manner. Therefore, the time-frequency resource occupied by the MIB in the time-frequency resource corresponding to the PBCH only needs to carry the remaining information in the indication information, thereby reducing the amount of information carried by the time-frequency resource that needs to pass through the PBCH, and saving the time-frequency resource of the PBCH.
进一步地,本申请提出利用解调参考信号(Demodulation Reference Signal,DMRS) 以隐式方式携带指示信息中的部分信息,例如SBTI中的2bit或3bit信息。这样PBCH中MIB占用的时频资源只需要传输SBTI中的剩余4bit或3bit信息,与PBCH中MIB占用的时频资源原本需要传输SBTI的全部6bit信息相比,节约了PBCH占用的时频资源。Further, the present application proposes to use a Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS) to carry part of the information in the indication information, such as 2-bit or 3-bit information in the SBTI, in an implicit manner. The time-frequency resource occupied by the MIB in the PBCH only needs to transmit the remaining 4 bits or 3 bits of information in the SBTI. Compared with all the 6-bit information of the SBTI, the time-frequency resources occupied by the MIB in the PBCH are saved, and the time-frequency resources occupied by the PBCH are saved.
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solutions in the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
图1给出了本申请实施例应用的一种网络系统的示意图。如图1所示,网络系统100可以包括网络设备102以及终端设备104、106、108、110、112和114。其中,网络设备与终端设备之间通过无线连接。应理解,图1仅以网络系统包括一个网络设备为例进行说明,但本发明实施例并不限于此,例如,系统还可以包括更多的网络设备;类似地,系统也可以包括更多的终端设备。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a network system to which the embodiment of the present application is applied. As shown in FIG. 1,
本说明书结合终端设备描述了各个实施例。终端设备也可以指UE、接入终端、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、用户代理。终端设备也可以是具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备,未来5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(Public Land Mobile Network,PLMN)网络中的终端设备等。This specification describes various embodiments in connection with a terminal device. A terminal device may also refer to a UE, an access terminal, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, and a user agent. The terminal device may also be a handheld device with wireless communication capabilities, a computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device, a terminal device in a future 5G network, or a future evolved public land mobile network (Public Land) Mobile network, PLMN) Terminal devices in the network, etc.
作为示例而非限定,在本发明实施例中,该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。在本申请各实施例中,以UE为例,对终端设备的结构和处理流程进行说明。By way of example and not limitation, in the embodiment of the present invention, the terminal device may also be a wearable device. A wearable device, which can also be called a wearable smart device, is a general term for applying wearable technology to intelligently design and wear wearable devices such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing, and shoes. A wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable devices are more than just a hardware device, but they also implement powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. Generalized wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-size, non-reliable smartphones for full or partial functions, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and focus on only one type of application, and need to work with other devices such as smartphones. Use, such as various smart bracelets for smart signs monitoring, smart jewelry, etc. In the embodiments of the present application, the structure and processing flow of the terminal device are described by taking the UE as an example.
本说明书结合网络设备描述了各个实施例。网络设备可以是用于与终端设备通信的设备,该网络设备可以是全球移动通讯(Global System of Mobile communication,GSM)或码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access,CDMA)中的基站(Base Transceiver Station,BTS),也可以是宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,WCDMA)系统中的基站(NodeB,NB),还可以是长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统中的演进型基站(Evolutional Node B,eNB或eNodeB),还可以是云无线接入网络(Cloud Radio Access Network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器,或者未来5G网络中的基站(gNB或gNodeB)。在本申请各实施例中,以基站为例,对网络设备的结构和处理流程进行说明。This description describes various embodiments in connection with a network device. The network device may be a device for communicating with the terminal device, and the network device may be a Global System of Mobile communication (GSM) or a base station in Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) (Base Transceiver Station) , BTS), may also be a base station (NodeB, NB) in a Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) system, or may be an evolved base station in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system ( The Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB) may also be a wireless controller in a Cloud Radio Access Network (CRAN) scenario, or a base station (gNB or gNodeB) in a future 5G network. In the embodiments of the present application, the structure and processing flow of the network device are described by taking a base station as an example.
附图2是本申请实施例提供的几种可能的同步信号块的结构的示意图。如图2所示,一个同步信号脉冲集包含多个SS block,一个同步信号脉冲集映射在至少一个时隙(slot)上发送。FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of structures of several possible synchronization signal blocks provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 2, a sync signal pulse set includes a plurality of SS blocks, and a sync signal pulse set map is transmitted on at least one slot.
可选地,在NR中,一个SS block中包含1个OFDM符号的主同步信号(Primary Synchronization Signal,PSS)或者新无线主同步信号(New Radio Primary Synchronization Signal,NR-PSS)、1个OFDM符号的辅同步信号(Secondary Synchronization Signal,SSS)或者新无线辅同步信号(New Radio Secondary Synchronization Signal,NR-SSS)和2个OFDM符号的物理广播信道(Physical Broadcast Channel,PBCH)或者新无线物理广播信道(New Radio Physical Broadcast Channel,NR-PBCH)。其中NR-PSS和NR-SSS可以分别具有传统标准(例如,LTE)中的PSS和SSS的功能。例如,NR-PSS可以用于确定OFDM符号定时、频率同步、时隙定时和小区组内的小区ID;NR-SSS可以用于确定帧定时、小区组等。或者,NR-PSS和NR-SSS也可以具有与目前的PSS和SSS不同的功能,本申请实施例对此并未限定。另外,NR-PSS和NR-SSS还可以采用分别与目前的PSS和SSS相同或不同的序列,本发明实施例对此也不限定。另外,在本申请实施例中,NR-PBCH可以具有与传统标准(例如,LTE)中的PBCH相同或不同的功能,本发明实施例对此也不限定。可选地,NR-PBCH中可以携带主信息块(Master Information Block,MIB)。需要说明的是PSS、SSS和PBCH分别对应的OFDM符号在SS block中的排列方式不限于图2所示的四种。Optionally, in the NR, an SS block includes a Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS) of 1 OFDM symbol or a New Radio Primary Synchronization Signal (NR-PSS), and 1 OFDM symbol. Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS) or New Radio Secondary Synchronization Signal (NR-SSS) and 2 OFDM symbols Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH) or new wireless physical broadcast channel (New Radio Physical Broadcast Channel, NR-PBCH). Among them, NR-PSS and NR-SSS can respectively have the functions of PSS and SSS in a legacy standard (for example, LTE). For example, NR-PSS can be used to determine OFDM symbol timing, frequency synchronization, slot timing, and cell ID within a cell group; NR-SSS can be used to determine frame timing, cell groups, and the like. Alternatively, the NR-PSS and the NR-SSS may have different functions from the current PSS and the SSS, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. In addition, the NR-PSS and the NR-SSS may also adopt the same or different sequences as the current PSS and the SSS, and the embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, the NR-PBCH may have the same or different functions as the PBCH in the traditional standard (for example, LTE), which is not limited by the embodiment of the present invention. Optionally, the NR-PBCH may carry a Master Information Block (MIB). It should be noted that the arrangement manner of the OFDM symbols corresponding to the PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH in the SS block is not limited to the four types shown in FIG. 2 .
为了简明起见,在本申请的后续实施例中,将NR-PSS和PSS统称为PSS,将NR-SSS和SSS统称为SSS,将NR-PBCH和PBCH统称为PBCH。For the sake of brevity, in the subsequent embodiments of the present application, NR-PSS and PSS are collectively referred to as PSS, NR-SSS and SSS are collectively referred to as SSS, and NR-PBCH and PBCH are collectively referred to as PBCH.
附图3是本申请实施例提供的传输同步信号的方法的原理流程图。附图3所示的方法包括以下步骤。FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application. The method illustrated in Figure 3 includes the following steps.
步骤30,网络设备生成同步信号块以及用以确定所述同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序的指示信息。Step 30: The network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set.
以基站为例的网络设备在生成ss block时可以生成用以指示该ss block在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序的指示信息,本申请以SBTI为例对所述指示信息进行说明。SBTI可以是网络设备中用以实现无线协议栈处理的芯片或者程序在无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC)层、媒体接入控制层(Media Access Control,MAC)层、或者物理(Pyhsical,PHY)层生成的,本申请在这里不对SBTI的生成方式进行限定。The network device in the case of the base station can generate the indication information indicating the ordering of the ss block in the burst of the synchronization signal in the ss block. The SBTI is used as an example to describe the indication information. The SBTI may be a chip or a program in the network device for implementing wireless protocol stack processing in a Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer, a Media Access Control (MAC) layer, or a physical (Pyhsical, PHY). The layer is generated, and the application does not limit the manner in which the SBTI is generated here.
步骤31,网络设备根据所述指示信息中的部分信息,生成解调参考信号序列。Step 31: The network device generates a demodulation reference signal sequence according to part of the information in the indication information.
指示信息中的部分信息是指指示信息中预定bit中的内容。例如,SBTI总共占用6bit,部分信息是指SBIT中的2bit或者3bit。本实施例对于部分信息对应的bit在SBTI中的位置不进行限定,可以是SBIT中连续的2bit或3bit的内容,也可以是SBIT中间隔的2bit或3bit的内容。以部分信息是指SBIT中的2bit为例,部分信息可以是SBTI中的第1-2bit中的内容,也可以是SBTI中的第3-4bit中的内容,或者也可以是SBIT中的倒数第1-2bit中的内容,或者也可以是SBIT中的第1bit和倒数第1bit中的内容。具体地,假设SBTI为 001100,如果部分信息是SBTI中的第1-2bit中的内容,则部分信息为00。 The partial information in the indication information refers to the content in the predetermined bit in the indication information. For example, SBTI occupies a total of 6 bits, and part of the information refers to 2 bits or 3 bits in SBIT. In this embodiment, the position of the bit corresponding to the partial information in the SBTI is not limited, and may be two consecutive or three-bit contents in the SBIT, or may be two-bit or three-bit content in the SBIT. The partial information refers to 2 bits in the SBIT as an example. The partial information may be the content in the 1-2 bit in the SBTI, or the content in the 3-4 bit in the SBTI, or may be the reciprocal in the SBIT. The content in 1-2 bits may be the content of the first bit and the last bit in the SBIT. Specifically, it is assumed that the SBTI is 00 1100, and if the partial information is the content in the 1-2th bit in the SBTI, the partial information is 00.
在本申请实施例中,解调参考信号序列用于对所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中传输的信号进行解调,换句话说,解调参考信号序列用于对PBCH中传输的信号进行解调,从而从解调结果中获得PBCH中传输的信息,例如MIB。In the embodiment of the present application, the demodulation reference signal sequence is used to demodulate a signal transmitted in a time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping. In other words, the demodulation reference signal sequence is used to perform a signal transmitted in the PBCH. Demodulation, thereby obtaining information transmitted in the PBCH, such as MIB, from the demodulation result.
生成解调参考信号的过程一般包括以下环节:首先,根据线性反馈位移寄存器(Linear Feedback Shift Register,LFSR)生成M序列。接下来,对M序列进行循环位移得到Gold序列。最后,从Gold序列中截取一段子序列作为解调参考信号序列,或者对Gold序列进行变换得到解调参考信号序列。The process of generating a demodulation reference signal generally includes the following steps: First, an M sequence is generated according to a Linear Feedback Shift Register (LFSR). Next, the M sequence is cyclically shifted to obtain a Gold sequence. Finally, a subsequence is intercepted from the Gold sequence as a demodulation reference signal sequence, or the Gold sequence is transformed to obtain a demodulation reference signal sequence.
附图4是一个LFSR的结构示意图。LFSR可以用一个多项式来描述,LFSR中的反馈点与该多项式中的系数α i相对应。多项式的项数也可以被看做是LFSR的尺寸。 Figure 4 is a schematic view showing the structure of an LFSR. The LFSR can be described by a polynomial, and the feedback point in the LFSR corresponds to the coefficient α i in the polynomial. The number of terms of a polynomial can also be considered as the size of the LFSR.
多项式的形式如f(x)=x L+α L-1x L-1+...+α 2x 2+α 1x+1,i=1...L-1,其中α i的取值为0 或1。 The form of the polynomial is f(x)=x L +α L-1 x L-1 +...+α 2 x 2 +α 1 x+1,i=1...L-1, where α i The value is 0 or 1.
在L的取值已确定的情况下,根据一个给定系数的多项式以及一个初始值,可以唯一地生成一个M序列,M序列的长度记为I,I的取值范围是L<I<2 L-1。 In the case where the value of L has been determined, an M sequence can be uniquely generated according to a polynomial of a given coefficient and an initial value. The length of the M sequence is denoted by I, and the range of I is L<I<2. L -1.
在L的取值已确定的情况下,如果一个多项式对应生成的序列是M序列,那么生成该M序列的多项式也被称为本原多项式(primitive polynomial)。M序列是一种具有良好的互相关性和良好的循环位移相关性的伪随机序列。良好的互相关性是指不同LFSR生成的两个M序列之间进行相关运算,相关峰值的能量很小。良好的循环位移相关性是指一个M序列与自身进行循环位移得到的序列之间相关运算,相关峰值的能量很小。寻找本原多项式的过程可以参考现有的文献,在这里不再详述。用长度为L的LFSR生成M序列时,除了需要本原多项式,还需要为LFSR设定一组初始值,这组初始值也可以被称为是M序列的初始值,即M序列中最初L个符号的取值。In the case where the value of L has been determined, if a sequence corresponding to a polynomial is an M sequence, the polynomial that generates the M sequence is also called a primitive polynomial. The M sequence is a pseudo-random sequence with good cross-correlation and good cyclic shift correlation. Good cross-correlation means that correlation operations are performed between two M sequences generated by different LFSRs, and the energy of the correlation peak is small. A good cyclic shift correlation refers to the correlation between an M sequence and a sequence obtained by cyclic shifting itself, and the energy of the correlation peak is small. The process of finding the primitive polynomial can refer to the existing literature and will not be described in detail herein. When generating an M sequence with a LFSR of length L, in addition to the primitive polynomial, a set of initial values needs to be set for the LFSR. This set of initial values may also be referred to as the initial value of the M sequence, ie, the initial L in the M sequence. The value of the symbols.
本申请中网络设备在L的取值已确定的情况下,根据两个不同本原多项式得到两个M序列后,后续对两个M序列进行循环位移得到Gold序列。并且按照预定的方式再根据Gold序列生成解调参考信号序列。如果在上述生成解调参考信号序列的过程中应用上述SBTI中的部分信息,使得Gold序列与SBTI中的部分信息唯一对应,那么解调参考信号序列与M序列实质上也是唯一对应的。In the case where the value of L is determined in the network device of the present application, after two M sequences are obtained according to two different primitive polynomials, the two M sequences are cyclically shifted to obtain a Gold sequence. And demodulating the reference signal sequence according to the Gold sequence in a predetermined manner. If the partial information in the SBTI is applied in the process of generating the demodulation reference signal sequence as described above, so that the Gold sequence uniquely corresponds to the partial information in the SBTI, the demodulation reference signal sequence and the M sequence are substantially uniquely corresponding.
网络设备根据SBTI中的部分信息生成解调参考信号序列并发送解调参考信号序列。终端设备在检测到解调参考信号序列后,可以利用与网络设备生成解调参考信号序列相对应的逆过程,根据检测到的解调参考信号序列获得SBTI中的部分信息。终端设备将获得的SBTI中的部分信息与通过PBCH中的第一资源显式发送的SBTI中的其余信息相组合,可以获得完整的SBTI。The network device generates a demodulation reference signal sequence based on the partial information in the SBTI and transmits a demodulation reference signal sequence. After detecting the demodulation reference signal sequence, the terminal device may obtain partial information in the SBTI according to the detected demodulation reference signal sequence by using an inverse process corresponding to the network device generating the demodulation reference signal sequence. The terminal device combines part of the information in the obtained SBTI with the rest of the information in the SBTI explicitly transmitted through the first resource in the PBCH to obtain a complete SBTI.
在上述根据LFSR生成解调参考信号序列的过程中,网络设备可以通过多种方式将SBTI中的部分信息应用于解调参考信号序列的生成过程,从而使得解调参考信号序列隐式地携带SBTI中的部分信息。这些方式包括但不限于:可以利用SBTI中的部分信息初始化LFSR的初始值,或者利用SBTI中的部分信息确定对M序列进行循环位移生成Gold序列时的循环位移的位数,或者利用SBTI中的部分信息确定从较长的Gold序列中截取解调参考信号序列时的起始位置。可以理解,上述方式也可以结合应用,例如根据SBTI中的部分信息确定对M序列进行循环位移生成Gold序列时的位数,并且根据SBTI中的部分信息确定从较长的Gold序列中截取解调参考信号序列时的起始位置。本申请实施例后续将结合各附图对解调参考信号序列的生成过程进行详细说明。In the process of generating the demodulation reference signal sequence according to the LFSR, the network device may apply part of the information in the SBTI to the process of generating the demodulation reference signal sequence in multiple manners, so that the demodulation reference signal sequence implicitly carries the SBTI. Part of the information. These methods include, but are not limited to, initializing the initial value of the LFSR using partial information in the SBTI, or determining the number of bits of the cyclic shift when the M sequence is cyclically shifted to generate the Gold sequence using partial information in the SBTI, or using the SBTI The partial information determines the starting position when the demodulated reference signal sequence is intercepted from the longer Gold sequence. It can be understood that the above manner may also be combined, for example, determining the number of bits when the M sequence is cyclically shifted to generate a Gold sequence according to partial information in the SBTI, and determining to extract the demodulation from the longer Gold sequence according to the partial information in the SBTI. The starting position when referring to the signal sequence. The process of generating a demodulation reference signal sequence will be described in detail later in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
步骤32,网络设备通过PBCH中的第一资源发送所述指示信息中除所述部分信息的之外的其余信息。Step 32: The network device sends, by using the first resource in the PBCH, the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information.
为了便于描述,本申请实施例对不同的资源进行区分,将PBCH符号映射的时频资源分为两类,即第一资源和第二资源。所述第一资源是所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中用以传输主信息块MIB的时频资源。所述第二资源是所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中与所述第一资源不同的时频资源。第二资源可以是所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中除第一资源外的资源,也可以是除第一资源外的部分资源。For convenience of description, the embodiment of the present application distinguishes different resources, and divides the time-frequency resources of the PBCH symbol mapping into two categories, that is, the first resource and the second resource. The first resource is a time-frequency resource used to transmit the primary information block MIB in the time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping. The second resource is a time-frequency resource different from the first resource in the time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping. The second resource may be a resource other than the first resource in the time-frequency resource mapped by the PBCH symbol, or may be a partial resource other than the first resource.
网络设备将所述指示信息中除所述部分信息的之外的其余信息映射到第一资源中。仍以SBIT为例,假设SBTI为 001100,如果部分信息是SBTI中的第1bit和第2bit中的内 容,则部分信息为00,其余信息为1100。网络设备将1100映射到第一资源的资源元素(Resource Element,RE)中,然后通过所述RE发送其余信息1100。 The network device maps the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information into the first resource. Still taking SBIT as an example, suppose the SBTI is 00 1100. If part of the information is the content of the first bit and the second bit in the SBTI, the partial information is 00, and the remaining information is 1100. The network device maps 1100 to a resource element (Resource Element, RE) of the first resource, and then transmits the remaining information 1100 through the RE.
步骤33,网络设备通过所述第二资源发送所述解调参考信号序列。Step 33: The network device sends the demodulation reference signal sequence by using the second resource.
网络设备将所述部分信息的映射到第二资源中。仍以SBIT为例,网络设备将00映射到第二资源的RE中,然后通过所述RE发送部分信息00。The network device maps the partial information into the second resource. Still taking SBIT as an example, the network device maps 00 to the RE of the second resource, and then sends the partial information 00 through the RE.
在本申请实施例提供的传输同步信号的方法中,网络设备将用以指示一个SS block在所属SS burst set中的排序的指示信息中的部分信息以隐式的方式携带在解调参考信号序列中,而不是将指示信息全部以显示的方式通过PBCH发送,从而减少了在PBCH中传输的数据量,节约了PBCH的时频资源。In the method for transmitting a synchronization signal provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device carries the partial information in the indication information of the order of the SS block in the SS burst set to be carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner. Instead of transmitting the indication information all by way of display through the PBCH, the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH is reduced, and the time-frequency resources of the PBCH are saved.
附图5是本申请实施例提供的一种传输同步信号的方法的流程图。附图5在附图3的基础上,着重对解调参考信号序列的生成过程、解调参考信号的发送过程、以及终端设备的接收过程进行了详细说明。在附图5所示的解调参考信号序列的生成过程中,网络设备选择一个尺寸较大的LFSR,根据指示信息中的部分信息初始化LFSR的初始值,从而生成与部分信息对应的较长的M序列。再对M序列进行循环位移,得到一个较长的Gold序列,从Gold序列中截取一个子序列作为解调参考信号序列。FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application. FIG. 5 is a detailed description of the generation process of the demodulation reference signal sequence, the transmission process of the demodulation reference signal, and the reception process of the terminal device on the basis of FIG. In the process of generating the demodulation reference signal sequence shown in FIG. 5, the network device selects a LFSR having a larger size, and initializes an initial value of the LFSR according to part of the information in the indication information, thereby generating a longer length corresponding to the partial information. M sequence. The M sequence is cyclically shifted to obtain a longer Gold sequence, and a subsequence is intercepted from the Gold sequence as a demodulation reference signal sequence.
步骤50,网络设备生成同步信号块以及用以确定所述同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序的指示信息。Step 50: The network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set.
以下步骤51~步骤53是对附图3中的步骤31进行详细说明。The following
步骤51,网络设备根据LFSR生成两个M序列,所述M序列的长度为I,I为自然数,所述LFSR的初始值c init是根据指示信息中的部分信息确定的。 Step 51: The network device generates two M sequences according to the LFSR, where the length of the M sequence is I, and I is a natural number, and the initial value c init of the LFSR is determined according to part of the information in the indication information.
其中LFSR的尺寸(即本原多项式的最多可能的项数)用L表示,LFSR生成的M序列的长度表示为I,I的取值范围为L<I<2 L-1。 The size of the LFSR (ie, the maximum number of possible terms of the primitive polynomial) is denoted by L, and the length of the M sequence generated by the LFSR is expressed as I, and the value of I ranges from L<I<2 L -1.
可选地,在本实施例中,L取值为31。相应地,LFSR生成的M序列的长度I取值范围为31<I<2 31-1,在本实施例中M序列的长度I取值为3344。LFSR分别根据两个本原多项式生成两个M序列。本申请实施例将在后续使用“第一本原多项式”、“第二本原多项式”的描述方式来区分不同的多项式,后续用类似方式描述的“第一子序列”,“第二子序列”等等并不是表示顺序关系,而是为了区别不同的子序列。 Optionally, in this embodiment, L takes a value of 31. Correspondingly, the length I of the M sequence generated by the LFSR ranges from 31<I<2 31 -1. In this embodiment, the length I of the M sequence is 3344. The LFSR generates two M sequences based on two primitive polynomials, respectively. The embodiment of the present application will distinguish different polynomials in the subsequent description manners using the "first primitive polynomial" and the "second primitive polynomial", and subsequently describe the "first subsequence" and the "second subsequence" in a similar manner. "Wait, not to indicate a sequence relationship, but to distinguish between different subsequences."
第一个本原多项式是x
31+x
3+1,LFSR对应生成的第一个M序列表示为x
0(n+31)=(x
0(n+3)+x
0(n))mod 2,其中n=I-31。
The first primitive polynomial is x 31 +x 3 +1, and the first M sequence generated by LFSR is represented as x 0 (n+31)=(x 0 (n+3)+x 0 (n))
第二个本原多项式是x
31+x
7+1,LFSR对应生成的第二个M序列表示为x
1(n+31)=(x
1(n+7)+x
1(n))mod 2,其中n=I-31。
The second primitive polynomial is x 31 +x 7 +1, and the second M sequence generated by LFSR is represented as x 1 (n+31)=(x 1 (n+7)+x 1 (n))
网络设备根据部分信息来初始化两个M序列的初始值,即x 0(0)~x 0(30),以及x 1(0)~x 1(30)的取值。第一个M序列的初始值为 第二个M序列的初始值为 其中c init=2 p*PCID+2 q*SS idx,其中PCID是小区标识,SS idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示。可选地,PCID是网络设备覆盖的小区的小区标识。 The network device initializes the initial values of the two M sequences according to the partial information, that is, x 0 (0) to x 0 (30), and the values of x 1 (0) to x 1 (30). The initial value of the first M sequence is The initial value of the second M sequence is Where c init = 2 p * PCID + 2 q * SS idx , where PCID is the cell identity and SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information. Optionally, the PCID is a cell identifier of a cell covered by the network device.
可选地,由于c init<2 31,因此2 p*PCID<2 30,2 q*SS idx<2 30。按照现有标准,PCID<2 10,所以p的取值为小于等于20的自然数。由于SS idx<2 3,所以q的取值为小于等于27的自然数。 Alternatively, since c init < 2 31 , 2 p *PCID<2 30 , 2 q *SS idx <2 30 . According to the existing standard, PCID < 2 10 , so the value of p is a natural number less than or equal to 20. Since SS idx <2 3 , the value of q is a natural number less than or equal to 27.
以部分信息为SBTI中的2bit内容为例,则部分信息的所有可能的取值是00,01,10,11, 则SS idx对应的取值是0,1,2,3。 For example, if the partial information is the 2-bit content in the SBTI, all possible values of the partial information are 00, 01, 10, and 11, and the values corresponding to the SS idx are 0, 1, 2, and 3.
以部分信息为SBTI中的3bit内容为例,则部分信息的所有可能的取值是000,001,010,011,100,101,110,111,则SS idx对应的取值是0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7。 For example, if the partial information is the 3-bit content in the SBTI, all possible values of the partial information are 000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110, 111, and the values corresponding to the SS idx are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7.
步骤52,网络设备对所述两个M序列进行N
c位循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列,所述Gold序列的长度为G,N
c、G为自然数,且G=I。
After
Gold序列表示为c(n)=(x
0(n+N
c)+x
1(n+N
c))mod 2。为了保证最终生成的解调参考信号序列具有较好的伪随机性,Gold序列的长度G足够长,则N
c的取值范围可以为0~5000。在本实施例中,N
c取值为3200,则生成的Gold序列的长度为3344,即G=I。
The Gold sequence is expressed as c(n)=(x 0 (n+N c )+x 1 (n+N c ))
步骤53,网络设备从所述Gold序列中截取一个子序列作为所述解调参考信号序列,截取的所述子序列的长度为D,D为自然数,且D小于G。Step 53: The network device intercepts a subsequence from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence, and the length of the subsequence intercepted is D, D is a natural number, and D is less than G.
只要解调参考信号序列的长度D小于或等于G即可。示例性地,在本实施例中截取的子序列,即解调参考信号序列的长度为144,这种情况下,解调参考信号序列表示为r(n)=1-2*c(n),n=1,...,144。As long as the length D of the demodulation reference signal sequence is less than or equal to G. Illustratively, the subsequence intercepted in this embodiment, that is, the length of the demodulation reference signal sequence is 144. In this case, the demodulation reference signal sequence is represented as r(n)=1-2*c(n) , n=1,...,144.
本实施例不限定从Gold序列中截取解调参考信号序列时的起始位置。This embodiment does not limit the starting position when the demodulation reference signal sequence is intercepted from the Gold sequence.
步骤54,网络设备通过PBCH中的第一资源发送所述指示信息中除所述部分信息的之外的其余信息。关于步骤54的说明请参照附图3中对于步骤32的描述。Step 54: The network device sends, by using the first resource in the PBCH, the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information. For a description of
可选地,如果ss block中包括2个PBCH符号,那么PBCH中的第二资源可以包括不同部分,即所述2个PBCH符号中的第一PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源,以及所述2个PBCH符号中的第二PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源。网络设备根据步骤51~步骤53所示的方法获得解调参考信号序列r(n)后,还可以执行以下步骤55~步骤57发送解调参考信号序列。即以下步骤55~步骤57为附图3所示的流程中的步骤33的一种实施方式。Optionally, if the ss block includes 2 PBCH symbols, the second resource in the PBCH may include different parts, that is, part of the time-frequency resources corresponding to the first PBCH symbol in the 2 PBCH symbols, and the 2 Part of the time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol in the PBCH symbols. After obtaining the demodulation reference signal sequence r(n) according to the method shown in
步骤55,网络设备将所述解调参考信号序列r(n)平均分为长度相同的第一子序列和第二子序列。例如网络设备将长度为144的解调参考信号序列分为长度为72的第一子序列和第二子序列。Step 55: The network device averages the demodulated reference signal sequence r(n) into a first subsequence and a second subsequence of the same length. For example, the network device divides the demodulated reference signal sequence of length 144 into a first subsequence and a second subsequence of
步骤56,网络设备将所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列分别映射到所述第二资源的不同部分。例如将所述第一子序列映射到第一PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源中,将所述第二子序列映射到第二PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源中。Step 56: The network device maps the first subsequence and the second subsequence to different parts of the second resource, respectively. For example, the first sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol, and the second sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
步骤57,网络设备通过所述第二资源的不同部分发送所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列。例如通过第一PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源发送所述第一子序列,通过第二PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源发送所述第二子序列。Step 57: The network device sends the first subsequence and the second subsequence through different parts of the second resource. For example, the first sub-sequence is transmitted by using a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol, and the second sub-sequence is sent by a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
在本申请实施例提供的传输同步信号的方法中,网络设备根据指示信息中的部分信息初始化用以生成M序列的LFSR,从而使得根据M序列生成的Gold序列、以及从Gold序列中截取的解调参考信号序列与所述部分信息是唯一对应的。通过这种方式将部分信息以隐式的方式携带在解调参考信号序列中,而不是将指示信息全部以显示的方式通过PBCH发送,从而减少了在PBCH中传输的数据量,节约了PBCH的时频资源。In the method for transmitting a synchronization signal provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device initializes the LFSR used to generate the M sequence according to the partial information in the indication information, so that the Gold sequence generated according to the M sequence and the solution intercepted from the Gold sequence are obtained. The tone reference signal sequence and the partial information are uniquely corresponding. In this way, part of the information is carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner, instead of transmitting the indication information through the PBCH in a manner of being displayed, thereby reducing the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH and saving the PBCH. Time-frequency resources.
相应地,终端设备在检测到解调参考信号后,执行与附图5中的步骤51~步骤53相对应的过程,获得解调参考信号中携带的部分信息,例如SBTI中的2bit或3bit的内容。终端设备进一步使用解调参考信号对PBCH的第一资源中传输的信息进行解调,从解调结果中获得所述指示信息中除所述部分信息之外的其余信息。终端设备结合得到的部分信息和其余信息,进而获得完整的指示信息,如SBTI中的全部6bit内容。Correspondingly, after detecting the demodulation reference signal, the terminal device performs a process corresponding to
步骤58,终端设备获得待选序列集合,所述待选序列集合中包括多个待选序列。Step 58: The terminal device obtains a candidate sequence set, where the candidate sequence set includes multiple candidate sequences.
可选地,待选序列集合可以是终端设备根据步骤51~步骤53所示的解调参考信号的生成规则生成的,也可以是终端设备从另一设备中获取到的。Optionally, the set of the candidate sequence may be generated by the terminal device according to the generation rule of the demodulation reference signal shown in
具体地,终端设备或另一设备生成一个待选序列的过程包括:Specifically, the process of generating a candidate sequence by the terminal device or another device includes:
根据LFSR生成两个M序列,所述LFSR的初始值是根据指示信息中的部分信息对应的取值集合中的一种取值确定的;Generating two M sequences according to the LFSR, where the initial value of the LFSR is determined according to one of the value sets corresponding to the partial information in the indication information;
对所述两个M序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列;The two M sequences are cyclically shifted and added to generate a Gold sequence;
从所述Gold序列中截取一个子序列作为待选序列。A subsequence is taken from the Gold sequence as a candidate sequence.
例如,当部分信息包含指示信息中的2bit数据时,终端设备针对SS
idx的所有可能的4种取值,采用步骤51~步骤53所示的方法生成4个待选序列。
For example, when the partial information includes the 2-bit data in the indication information, the terminal device generates four candidate sequences by using the methods shown in
步骤59,终端设备检测到网络设备发送的解调参考信号。Step 59: The terminal device detects a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device.
步骤510,终端设备从所述待选序列集合中选择出与所述解调参考信号相关性最高的一个待选序列。Step 510: The terminal device selects, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal.
可选地,终端设备将接收到的解调参考信号与所述待选序列集合中的每个待选序列分别进行相关性检测,确定与所示解调参考信号相关性检测峰值的最高的待选序列作为选择出的待选序列。Optionally, the terminal device performs correlation detection on the received demodulation reference signal and each candidate sequence in the candidate sequence set, and determines a highest peak of correlation detection peak value with the demodulation reference signal shown. The sequence is selected as the selected candidate sequence.
步骤511,终端设备根据所述选择出的待选序列,确定生成所述选择出的待选序列时用以确定LFSR的初始值的部分信息。Step 511: The terminal device determines, according to the selected candidate sequence, part of information used to determine an initial value of the LFSR when the selected candidate sequence is generated.
可选地,在步骤511之后还包括:步骤512,终端设备使用检测到的解调参考信号对所述网络设备通过PBCH符号映射的时频资源中的第一资源发送的信号进行解调,从而获得通过所述第一资源发送的其余信息。Optionally, after
步骤513,终端设备对步骤511得到的部分信息和步骤512得到的其余信息进行组合,从而得到完整的指示信息。In
附图6、附图7分别是本申请实施例提供的另外两种传输同步信号的方法的流程图。附图6-7在附图3的基础上,着重对解调参考信号序列的生成过程、解调参考信号的发送过程、以及终端设备的接收过程进行了详细说明。在附图6、附图7所示的解调参考信号序列的生成过程中,网络设备选择一个尺寸较大的LFSR,根据预定初始值生成两个M序列。继而对两个M序列进行循环位移生成一个较长的Gold序列。根据部分信息确定从Gold序列中截取至少一段子序列作为解调参考信号序列时的起始位置,然后根据确定出的起始位置从Gold序列中截取至少一个子序列作为解调参考信号序列。FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 are respectively a flowchart of two other methods for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application. 6-7, on the basis of FIG. 3, the generation process of the demodulation reference signal sequence, the transmission process of the demodulation reference signal, and the reception process of the terminal device are described in detail. In the process of generating the demodulation reference signal sequence shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, the network device selects a LFSR having a larger size and generates two M sequences according to a predetermined initial value. The two M sequences are then cyclically shifted to generate a longer Gold sequence. And determining, according to the partial information, the starting position when the at least one sub-sequence is intercepted from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence, and then extracting at least one sub-sequence from the Gold sequence according to the determined starting position as the demodulation reference signal sequence.
附图6所示的解调参考信号序列的生成过程的特点是生成一个Gold序列,从Gold序列中截取一段子序列作为解调参考信号序列后,将解调参考信号序列均分为两段子序列,分别对两段子序列进行资源映射。The generation process of the demodulation reference signal sequence shown in FIG. 6 is characterized in that a Gold sequence is generated, and a sub-sequence is intercepted from the Gold sequence as a demodulation reference signal sequence, and the demodulation reference signal sequence is equally divided into two sub-sequences. , resource mapping is performed on two sub-sequences respectively.
附图7所示的解调参考信号序列的生成过程的特点是生成一个Gold序列,分别从该Gold序列中截取两段较短的子序列作为解调参考信号序列,分别对两段解调参考信号序列进行资源映射。The process of generating the demodulation reference signal sequence shown in FIG. 7 is characterized in that a Gold sequence is generated, and two short sub-sequences are respectively intercepted from the Gold sequence as a demodulation reference signal sequence, and the two-stage demodulation reference is respectively performed. The signal sequence is used for resource mapping.
附图6是本申请实施例提供的另一种传输同步信号的方法的示意图。FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application.
步骤60,网络设备生成同步信号块以及用以确定所述同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序的指示信息。Step 60: The network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set.
以下步骤61~步骤63是对附图3中的步骤31进行详细说明。The following
步骤61,网络设备通过LFSR生成两个M序列,所述M序列的长度为I,I为自然数。Step 61: The network device generates two M sequences by using the LFSR, where the length of the M sequence is I, and I is a natural number.
其中LFSR的尺寸(即本原多项式的最多可能的级数)用L表示,LFSR生成的M序列的长度表示为I,I的取值范围为L<I<2 L-1。可选地,在本实施例中,L取值为31。相应地,LFSR生成的M序列的长度I取值范围为31<I<2 31-1,在本实施例中M序列的长度I取值为3344。LFSR分别根据两个本原多项式生成两个M序列。 The size of the LFSR (ie, the most probable number of levels of the primitive polynomial) is denoted by L. The length of the M sequence generated by the LFSR is expressed as I, and the value range of I is L<I<2 L -1. Optionally, in this embodiment, L takes a value of 31. Correspondingly, the length I of the M sequence generated by the LFSR ranges from 31<I<2 31 -1. In this embodiment, the length I of the M sequence is 3344. The LFSR generates two M sequences based on two primitive polynomials, respectively.
第一个本原多项式是x
31+x
3+1,LFSR对应生成的第一个M序列表示为x
0(n+31)=(x
0(n+3)+x
0(n))mod 2,其中n=I-31。
The first primitive polynomial is x 31 +x 3 +1, and the first M sequence generated by LFSR is represented as x 0 (n+31)=(x 0 (n+3)+x 0 (n))
第二个本原多项式是x
31+x
7+1,LFSR对应生成的第二个M序列表示为x
1(n+31)=(x
1(n+7)+x
1(n))mod 2,其中n=I-31。
The second primitive polynomial is x 31 +x 7 +1, and the second M sequence generated by LFSR is represented as x 1 (n+31)=(x 1 (n+7)+x 1 (n))
网络设备预先设定两个M序列的初始值,即x 0(0)~x 0(30),以及x 1(0)~x 1(30)的取值。第一个M序列的初始值为 第二个M序列的初始值为 可选地,c init=2 m*PCID+1,其中PCID是小区标识。 The network device presets the initial values of the two M sequences, that is, x 0 (0) to x 0 (30), and the values of x 1 (0) to x 1 (30). The initial value of the first M sequence is The initial value of the second M sequence is Optionally, c init = 2 m * PCID+1, where PCID is the cell identity.
可选地,由于c init<2 31,因此2 m*PCID<2 31。按照现有标准,PCID<2 10,所以p的取值为小于等于21的自然数。 Alternatively, since c init <2 31 , 2 m *PCID<2 31 . According to the existing standard, PCID < 2 10 , so the value of p is a natural number less than or equal to 21.
步骤62,网络设备对所述两个M序列进行N
c位循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列,所述Gold序列的长度为G,N
c、G为自然数,且G=I。
After
所述Gold序列表示为c(n)=(x
0(n+N
c)+x
1(n+N
c))mod 2。可选地,为了保证最终生成的解调参考信号序列具有较好的伪随机性,Gold序列的长度G足够长,则N
c的取值范围可以为0~5000。在本实施例中,N
c取值为3200,则生成的Gold序列的长度为3344,即G=I。
The Gold sequence is represented as c(n)=(x 0 (n+N c )+x 1 (n+N c ))
步骤63,网络设备从所述Gold序列中截取一段子序列作为所述解调参考信号序列,所述子序列被截取时的起始位置是根据所述部分信息确定的,截取的所述子序列的长度为D,D为自然数。Step 63: The network device intercepts a sub-sequence from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence, where a starting position when the sub-sequence is intercepted is determined according to the partial information, and the sub-sequence is intercepted. The length is D and D is a natural number.
所述网络设备根据所述部分信息,确定一个数值k, 其中SS idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示。 The network device determines a value k according to the partial information, Where SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information.
所述网络设备以k为起始位置,从所述Gold序列中截取一段长度为D的子序列作为所述解调参考信号序列。The network device starts with k, and intercepts a sub-sequence of length D from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence.
可选地,如果D的取值为144,则解调参考信号序列可以表示为r(n)=1-2*c(n),n=k,...,k+143。Alternatively, if the value of D is 144, the demodulation reference signal sequence may be expressed as r(n)=1-2*c(n), n=k, . . . , k+143.
步骤64,网络设备通过PBCH中的第一资源发送所述指示信息中除所述部分信息的之外的其余信息。关于步骤64的说明请参照附图3中对于步骤32的描述。Step 64: The network device sends, by using the first resource in the PBCH, the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information. For a description of
可选地,如果ss block中包括2个PBCH符号,那么PBCH中的第二资源可以包括不同部分,即所述2个PBCH符号中的第一PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源,以及所述2个PBCH符号中的第二PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源。网络设备根据步骤61~步骤63所示的方法获得解调参考信号序列r(n)后,还可以执行以下步骤65~步骤67发送解调参考信号序列。即步骤65~步骤67为附图3所示的流程中的步骤33的一种实施方式。Optionally, if the ss block includes 2 PBCH symbols, the second resource in the PBCH may include different parts, that is, part of the time-frequency resources corresponding to the first PBCH symbol in the 2 PBCH symbols, and the 2 Part of the time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol in the PBCH symbols. After obtaining the demodulation reference signal sequence r(n) according to the method shown in
步骤65,网络设备将所述解调参考信号序列r(n)平均分为长度相同的第一子序列和第二子序列。即网络设备将长度为144的解调参考信号序列分为长度为72的第一子序列和第二子序列。Step 65: The network device divides the demodulation reference signal sequence r(n) into first subsequences and second subsequences of the same length. That is, the network device divides the demodulation reference signal sequence of length 144 into a first subsequence and a second subsequence of
步骤66,网络设备将所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列分别映射到所述第二资源的不同部分。例如将所述第一子序列映射到第一PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源中,将所述第二子序列映射到第二PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源中。Step 66: The network device maps the first sub-sequence and the second sub-sequence to different parts of the second resource, respectively. For example, the first sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol, and the second sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
步骤67,网络设备通过所述第二资源的不同部分发送所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列。例如通过第一PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源发送所述第一子序列,通过第二PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源发送所述第二子序列。Step 67: The network device sends the first subsequence and the second subsequence through different parts of the second resource. For example, the first sub-sequence is transmitted by using a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol, and the second sub-sequence is sent by a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
在本申请实施例提供的解调参考信号序列的生成方法中,网络设备根据一个尺寸较大的LFSR生成一个较长的Gold序列。在从较长的Gold序列中截取一段子序列解调参考信号序列时,截取子序列的起始位置是根据指示信息中的部分信息确定的,从而使得截取的解调参考信号序列与所述部分信息是唯一对应的。通过这种方式将部分信息以隐式的方式携带在解调参考信号序列中,而不是将指示信息全部以显示的方式通过PBCH发送,从而减少了在PBCH中传输的数据量,节约了PBCH的时频资源。In the method for generating a demodulation reference signal sequence provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device generates a longer Gold sequence according to a larger LFSR. When a sub-sequence demodulation reference signal sequence is intercepted from a longer Gold sequence, the starting position of the truncated sub-sequence is determined according to part of the information in the indication information, such that the truncated demodulation reference signal sequence and the portion are Information is uniquely corresponding. In this way, part of the information is carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner, instead of transmitting the indication information through the PBCH in a manner of being displayed, thereby reducing the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH and saving the PBCH. Time-frequency resources.
相应地,终端设备在检测到解调参考信号后,执行与附图6中的步骤61~步骤63相对应的过程,获得解调参考信号中携带的部分信息,例如SBTI中的2bit或3bit的内容。终端设备进一步使用解调参考信号对PBCH的第一资源中传输的信息进行解调,从解调结果中获得所述指示信息中除所述部分信息之外的其余信息。终端设备结合得到的部分信息和其余信息,进而获得完整的指示信息,如SBTI中的全部6bit内容。Correspondingly, after detecting the demodulation reference signal, the terminal device performs a process corresponding to
步骤68,终端设备获得待选序列集合,所述待选序列集合中包括多个可能的待选序列。Step 68: The terminal device obtains a candidate sequence set, where the candidate sequence set includes multiple possible candidate sequences.
可选地,待选序列集合可以是终端设备根据步骤61~步骤63所示的解调参考信号的生成规则生成的,也可以是终端设备从另一设备中获取到的。Optionally, the set of the candidate sequence may be generated by the terminal device according to the generation rule of the demodulation reference signal shown in
具体地,终端设备或另一设备生成一个待选序列的过程包括:Specifically, the process of generating a candidate sequence by the terminal device or another device includes:
根据LFSR生成两个M序列;Generating two M sequences according to the LFSR;
对所述两个M序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列;The two M sequences are cyclically shifted and added to generate a Gold sequence;
从所述Gold序列中截取至少一段子序列作为所述解调参考信号序列,所述子序列被截取时的起始位置是根据指示信息中的部分信息对应的取值集合中的一种取值确定的。And intercepting at least one subsequence from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence, where a starting position when the subsequence is intercepted is a value according to a value set corresponding to part of the information in the indication information. definite.
例如,当部分信息包含指示信息中的2bit数据时,终端设备针对SS
idx的所有可能的4种取值,采用步骤61~步骤63所示的方法生成4个待选序列。
For example, when the partial information includes the 2-bit data in the indication information, the terminal device generates four candidate sequences by using the methods shown in
步骤69,终端设备检测到网络设备发送的解调参考信号。Step 69: The terminal device detects a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device.
步骤610,终端设备从所述待选序列集合中选择出与所述解调参考信号相关性最高的一个待选序列。Step 610: The terminal device selects, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal.
可选地,终端设备将接收到的解调参考信号与所述待选序列集合中的每个待选序列分别进行相关性检测,确定与所示解调参考信号相关性检测峰值的最高的待选序列作为选择出的待选序列。Optionally, the terminal device performs correlation detection on the received demodulation reference signal and each candidate sequence in the candidate sequence set, and determines a highest peak of correlation detection peak value with the demodulation reference signal shown. The sequence is selected as the selected candidate sequence.
步骤611,终端设备根据所述选择出的待选序列,确定生成所述选择出的待选序列时用以确定子序列被截取时的起始位置的部分信息。Step 611: The terminal device determines, according to the selected candidate sequence, part of information when determining the selected candidate sequence to determine a starting position when the subsequence is intercepted.
可选地,在步骤611之后还包括:步骤612,终端设备使用检测到的解调参考信号对所述网络设备通过PBCH符号映射的时频资源中的第一资源发送的信号进行解调,从而获得通过所述第一资源发送的其余信息。Optionally, after
步骤613,终端设备对步骤611得到的部分信息和步骤612得到的其余信息进行组合, 从而得到完整的指示信息。In
附图7是本申请实施例提供的另一种传输同步信号的方法的示意图。FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application.
步骤70,网络设备生成同步信号块以及用以确定所述同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序的指示信息。Step 70: The network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set.
以下步骤71~步骤73是对附图3中的步骤31进行详细说明。The following
步骤71,网络设备通过LFSR生成两个M序列,所述M序列的长度为I,I为自然数。Step 71: The network device generates two M sequences through the LFSR, where the length of the M sequence is I, and I is a natural number.
步骤72,网络设备对所述两个M序列进行N
c位循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列,所述Gold序列的长度为G,N
c、G为自然数,且G=I。
After
附图7中的步骤71与附图6中的步骤61类似,附图7中的步骤72与附图6中的步骤62类似,可以参考附图6中相关步骤的详细说明,在这里不再重复。
步骤73,网络设备从所述Gold序列中截取两段子序列作为所述解调参考信号序列,所述子序列被截取时的起始位置是根据所述部分信息确定的,截取的所述子序列的长度为D,D为自然数。Step 73: The network device intercepts two sub-sequences from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence, where a starting position when the sub-sequence is intercepted is determined according to the partial information, and the sub-sequence is intercepted. The length is D and D is a natural number.
网络设备根据部分信息确定两个起始位置,两个起始位置分别用k 1和k 2表示, k 2=N c-k 1+1,其中SS idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示。 The network device determines two starting positions based on the partial information, and the two starting positions are represented by k 1 and k 2 , respectively. k 2 = N c - k 1 +1, where SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information.
网络设备以k 1为起始位置,从所述Gold序列中截取第一子序列,所述第一子序列的长度为D,D=I*1/2。可选地,第一子序列的长度为72。 The network device starts with k 1 and intercepts a first subsequence from the Gold sequence, the first subsequence having a length of D, D=I*1/2. Optionally, the first subsequence has a length of 72.
所述网络设备以k 2为起始位置,从所述Gold序列中截取第二子序列,所述第二子序列的长度也为D,所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列为所述解调参考信号序列。可选地,第二子序列的长度为72。 The network device starts with k 2 as a starting position, and intercepts a second subsequence from the Gold sequence, where the length of the second subsequence is also D, and the first subsequence and the second subsequence are The demodulation reference signal sequence. Optionally, the second subsequence has a length of 72.
可选地,I为3344,N c为3200,G为3344,D为72,所述第一子序列表示为r 1(n)=1-2*c(n),n=k 1,...,k 1+71,所述第二子序列表示为r 2(n)=1-2*c(n),n=k 2,...,k 2+71。 Optionally, I is 3344, N c is 3200, G is 3344, D is 72, and the first subsequence is represented as r 1 (n)=1-2*c(n), n=k 1 . .., k 1 +71, the second subsequence is denoted as r 2 (n)=1-2*c(n), n=k 2 , . . . , k 2 +71.
步骤74,网络设备通过PBCH中的第一资源发送所述指示信息中除所述部分信息的之外的其余信息。关于步骤74的说明请参照附图3中对于步骤32的描述。Step 74: The network device sends, by using the first resource in the PBCH, the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information. For a description of
可选地,如果ss block中包括2个PBCH符号,那么PBCH中的第二资源可以包括不同部分,即所述2个PBCH符号中的第一PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源,以及所述2个PBCH符号中的第二PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源。网络设备根据步骤71~步骤73所示的方法获得解调参考信号序列r
1(n)和r
2(n)后,还可以执行以下步骤75~步骤76发送解调参考信号序列。即步骤75~步骤76为附图3所示的流程中的步骤33的一种实施方式。
Optionally, if the ss block includes 2 PBCH symbols, the second resource in the PBCH may include different parts, that is, part of the time-frequency resources corresponding to the first PBCH symbol in the 2 PBCH symbols, and the 2 Part of the time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol in the PBCH symbols. After the network device obtains the demodulation reference signal sequences r 1 (n) and r 2 (n) according to the methods shown in
步骤75,网络设备将第一子序列r 1(n)和第二子序列r 2(n)分别映射到所述第二资源的不同部分。例如将所述第一子序列映射到第一PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源中,将所述第二子序列映射到第二PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源中。 Step 75: The network device maps the first sub-sequence r 1 (n) and the second sub-sequence r 2 (n) to different parts of the second resource, respectively. For example, the first sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol, and the second sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
步骤76,网络设备通过所述第二资源的不同部分发送所述第一子序列r 1(n)和所述第二子序列r 2(n)。例如通过第一PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源发送所述第一子序列,通过第二PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源发送所述第二子序列。 Step 76: The network device sends the first sub-sequence r 1 (n) and the second sub-sequence r 2 (n) through different parts of the second resource. For example, the first sub-sequence is transmitted by using a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol, and the second sub-sequence is sent by a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
在本申请实施例提供的解调参考信号序列的生成方法中,网络设备根据一个尺寸较大的LFSR生成一个较长的Gold序列。在从较长的Gold序列中截取两段子序列解调参考信号序列时,截取每段子序列的起始位置是根据指示信息中的部分信息确定的,从而使得截取的解调参考信号序列与所述部分信息是唯一对应的。通过这种方式将部分信息以隐式的方式携带在解调参考信号序列中,而不是将指示信息全部以显示的方式通过PBCH发送,从而 减少了在PBCH中传输的数据量,节约了PBCH的时频资源。In the method for generating a demodulation reference signal sequence provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device generates a longer Gold sequence according to a larger LFSR. When truncating two sub-sequence demodulation reference signal sequences from a longer Gold sequence, truncating the starting position of each sub-sequence is determined according to partial information in the indication information, such that the truncated demodulation reference signal sequence is Some of the information is unique. In this way, part of the information is carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner, instead of transmitting the indication information through the PBCH in a manner of being displayed, thereby reducing the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH and saving the PBCH. Time-frequency resources.
相应地,终端设备在检测到解调参考信号后,执行与附图7中的步骤71~步骤73相对应的过程,获得解调参考信号中携带的部分信息,例如SBTI中的2bit或3bit的内容。终端设备进一步使用解调参考信号对PBCH的第一资源中传输的信息进行解调,从解调结果中获得所述指示信息中除所述部分信息之外的其余信息。终端设备结合得到的部分信息和其余信息,进而获得完整的指示信息,如SBTI中的全部6bit内容。Correspondingly, after detecting the demodulation reference signal, the terminal device performs a process corresponding to step 71 to step 73 in FIG. 7 to obtain partial information carried in the demodulation reference signal, for example, 2 bit or 3 bit in the SBTI. content. The terminal device further demodulates the information transmitted in the first resource of the PBCH by using the demodulation reference signal, and obtains the remaining information of the indication information except the partial information from the demodulation result. The terminal device combines the obtained partial information with the rest of the information to obtain complete indication information, such as all 6-bit content in the SBTI.
步骤77,终端设备获得待选序列集合,所述待选序列集合中包括多个待选序列。Step 77: The terminal device obtains a candidate sequence set, where the candidate sequence set includes multiple candidate sequences.
可选地,待选序列集合可以是终端设备根据步骤71~步骤73所示的解调参考信号的生成规则生成的,也可以是终端设备从另一设备中获取到的。Optionally, the set of the candidate sequence may be generated by the terminal device according to the generation rule of the demodulation reference signal shown in
具体地,终端设备或另一设备生成一个待选序列的过程包括:Specifically, the process of generating a candidate sequence by the terminal device or another device includes:
根据LFSR生成两个M序列;Generating two M sequences according to the LFSR;
对所述两个M序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列;The two M sequences are cyclically shifted and added to generate a Gold sequence;
从所述Gold序列中截取至少一段子序列作为所述解调参考信号序列,所述子序列被截取时的起始位置是根据指示信息中的部分信息对应的取值集合中的一种取值确定的。And intercepting at least one subsequence from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence, where a starting position when the subsequence is intercepted is a value according to a value set corresponding to part of the information in the indication information. definite.
例如,当部分信息包含指示信息中的2bit数据时,终端设备针对SS idx的所有可能的4种取值,采用步骤71~步骤73所示的方法生成4个待选序列。 For example, when the partial information includes the 2-bit data in the indication information, the terminal device generates four candidate sequences by using the methods shown in steps 71-73 for all possible four values of the SS idx .
步骤78,终端设备检测到网络设备发送的解调参考信号。Step 78: The terminal device detects a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device.
步骤79,终端设备从所述待选序列集合中选择出与所述解调参考信号相关性最高的一个待选序列。Step 79: The terminal device selects, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal.
可选地,终端设备将接收到的解调参考信号与所述待选序列集合中的每个待选序列分别进行相关性检测,确定与所示解调参考信号相关性检测峰值的最高的待选序列作为选择出的待选序列。Optionally, the terminal device performs correlation detection on the received demodulation reference signal and each candidate sequence in the candidate sequence set, and determines a highest peak of correlation detection peak value with the demodulation reference signal shown. The sequence is selected as the selected candidate sequence.
步骤710,终端设备根据所述选择出的待选序列,确定生成所述选择出的待选序列时用以确定子序列被截取时的起始位置的部分信息。Step 710: The terminal device determines, according to the selected candidate sequence, part of information for determining a starting position when the selected sequence is to be selected when the selected sequence is to be intercepted.
可选地,在步骤710之后,还包括:Optionally, after
步骤711,终端设备使用检测到的解调参考信号对所述网络设备通过PBCH符号映射的时频资源中的第一资源发送的信号进行解调,从而获得通过所述第一资源发送的其余信息。Step 711: The terminal device demodulates the signal sent by the first resource in the time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping by using the detected demodulation reference signal, so as to obtain the remaining information sent by the first resource. .
步骤712,终端设备对步骤710得到的部分信息和步骤711得到的其余信息进行组合,从而得到完整的指示信息。
附图8、附图9和附图10分别是本申请实施例提供的另外几种传输同步信号的方法的流程图。附图8、附图9和附图10在附图3的基础上,着重对解调参考信号序列的生成过程、解调参考信号的发送过程、以及终端设备的接收过程进行了详细说明。在附图8~附图10所示的解调参考信号序列的生成过程中,网络设备选择一个LFSR,根据预定初始值生成至少一组输出序列(输出序列可以是LFSR直接生成的M序列,也可以是基于LFSR直接生成的M序列循环补足后得到的另一序列),继而对每组输出序列进行循环位移后相加得到一个Gold序列,从而得到至少一个Gold序列,其中循环位移的位数是根据所述指示信息中的部分信息确定的。FIG. 8 , FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are respectively a flowchart of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal provided by an embodiment of the present application. 8 , FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 on the basis of FIG. 3, focusing on the generation process of the demodulation reference signal sequence, the transmission process of the demodulation reference signal, and the reception process of the terminal device are described in detail. In the process of generating the demodulation reference signal sequence shown in FIG. 8 to FIG. 10, the network device selects an LFSR, and generates at least one set of output sequences according to a predetermined initial value (the output sequence may be an M sequence directly generated by the LFSR, It may be another sequence obtained after the M sequence is directly complemented by the LFSR, and then each of the output sequences is cyclically shifted and added to obtain a Gold sequence, thereby obtaining at least one Gold sequence, wherein the number of bits of the cyclic shift is It is determined according to part of the information in the indication information.
附图8所示的解调参考信号序列的生成过程的特点是,网络设备选择一个尺寸较大的LFSR,根据预定初始值生成一组M序列,继而对M序列进行循环位移生成一个较长的Gold序列,从而得到一个Gold序列,其中循环位移的位数是根据所述指示信息中的部分信息确定的。网络设备进一步从Gold序列中截取一段子序列作为解调参考信号序列。The process of generating the demodulation reference signal sequence shown in FIG. 8 is characterized in that the network device selects a larger LFSR, generates a set of M sequences according to a predetermined initial value, and then cyclically shifts the M sequence to generate a longer one. The Gold sequence, thereby obtaining a Gold sequence, wherein the number of bits of the cyclic shift is determined based on the partial information in the indication information. The network device further intercepts a subsequence from the Gold sequence as a demodulation reference signal sequence.
在附图9~附图10所示的解调参考信号序列的生成过程中,网络设备选择一个尺寸较小的LFSR,根据预定初始值生成至少一组M序列。对每个M序列进行循环补足后得到一个输出序列。继而对每组输出序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个较短的Gold序列,从而得到至少一个Gold序列,其中循环位移的位数是根据所述指示信息中的部分信息确定的。根据每个Gold序列对应生成一个与Gold序列长度相同的解调参考信号序列。In the process of generating the demodulation reference signal sequence shown in FIGS. 9 to 10, the network device selects a LFSR having a smaller size and generates at least one set of M sequences according to a predetermined initial value. An output sequence is obtained by cyclically complementing each M sequence. Then, each set of output sequences is cyclically shifted and added to generate a shorter Gold sequence, thereby obtaining at least one Gold sequence, wherein the number of bits of the cyclic shift is determined according to part of the information in the indication information. A demodulation reference signal sequence having the same length as the Gold sequence is generated according to each Gold sequence.
附图9和附图10所示的解调参考信号序列的生成过程的差别是生成的Gold序列的数目和长度不同。附图9所示的方法LFSR生成一组输出序列,进而生成一个Gold序列,根据Gold序列对应生成解调参考信号序列后,将解调参考信号序列均分为长度相同的两段子序列,分别对两段子序列进行资源映射。附图10所示的方法LFSR生成两组输出序列,进而生成两个Gold序列,分别根据每个Gold序列生成一个与Gold序列长度相同的解调参考信号序列,分别将两段解调参考信号序列进行资源映射。The difference in the generation process of the demodulation reference signal sequence shown in Figs. 9 and 10 is that the number and length of the generated Gold sequences are different. The method LFSR shown in FIG. 9 generates a set of output sequences, and then generates a Gold sequence. After generating a demodulation reference signal sequence according to the Gold sequence, the demodulation reference signal sequence is equally divided into two sub-sequences of the same length, respectively. Two sub-sequences are used for resource mapping. The method LFSR shown in FIG. 10 generates two sets of output sequences, and then generates two Gold sequences, and generates a demodulation reference signal sequence having the same length as the Gold sequence according to each Gold sequence, respectively, and respectively demodulates the reference signal sequence of the two segments. Perform resource mapping.
附图8是本申请实施例提供的另一种传输同步信号的方法的示意图。FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application.
步骤80,网络设备生成同步信号块以及用以确定所述同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序的指示信息。Step 80: The network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set.
以下步骤81~步骤83是对附图3中的步骤31进行详细说明。The following
步骤81,网络设备通过LFSR生成两个M序列,所述M序列的长度为I,I为自然数。Step 81: The network device generates two M sequences by using the LFSR, where the length of the M sequence is I, and I is a natural number.
其中LFSR的尺寸(即本原多项式的最多可能的级数)用L表示,LFSR生成的M序列的长度表示为I,I的取值范围为L<I<2 L-1。可选地,在本实施例中,L取值为31。相应地,LFSR生成的M序列的长度I取值范围为31<I<2 31-1,在本实施例中M序列的长度I取值为3344。LFSR分别根据两个本原多项式生成两个M序列。 The size of the LFSR (ie, the most probable number of levels of the primitive polynomial) is denoted by L. The length of the M sequence generated by the LFSR is expressed as I, and the value range of I is L<I<2 L -1. Optionally, in this embodiment, L takes a value of 31. Correspondingly, the length I of the M sequence generated by the LFSR ranges from 31<I<2 31 -1. In this embodiment, the length I of the M sequence is 3344. The LFSR generates two M sequences based on two primitive polynomials, respectively.
第一个本原多项式是x
31+x
3+1,LFSR对应生成的第一个M序列表示为x
0(n+31)=(x
0(n+3)+x
0(n))mod 2,其中n=I-31。
The first primitive polynomial is x 31 +x 3 +1, and the first M sequence generated by LFSR is represented as x 0 (n+31)=(x 0 (n+3)+x 0 (n))
第二个本原多项式是x
31+x
7+1,LFSR对应生成的第二个M序列表示为x
1(n+31)=(x
1(n+7)+x
1(n))mod 2,其中n=I-31。
The second primitive polynomial is x 31 +x 7 +1, and the second M sequence generated by LFSR is represented as x 1 (n+31)=(x 1 (n+7)+x 1 (n))
网络设备预先设定两个M序列的初始值,即x 0(0)~x 0(30),以及x 1(0)~x 1(30)的取值。第一个M序列的初始值为 第二个M序列的初始值为 其中c init=2 m*PCID+1,其中PCID是小区标识。 The network device presets the initial values of the two M sequences, that is, x 0 (0) to x 0 (30), and the values of x 1 (0) to x 1 (30). The initial value of the first M sequence is The initial value of the second M sequence is Where c init = 2 m * PCID+1, where PCID is the cell identity.
可选地,m是小于等于21的自然数。Alternatively, m is a natural number less than or equal to 21.
步骤82,网络设备根据指示信息中的部分信息,确定循环位移的位数N
c。
在本实施例中N c=3200*(SS idx+1),其中SS idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示。 In the present embodiment, N c = 3200 * (SS idx +1), where SS idx is a decimal representation of the partial information.
步骤83,网络设备对所述两个M序列进行N c位循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列,所述Gold序列的长度为G,N c、G为自然数,且G=I。 Step 83: The network device adds the N c -bit cyclic shift to the two M sequences, and generates a Gold sequence. The length of the Gold sequence is G, N c , G are natural numbers, and G=I.
相应地,Gold序列表示为c(n)=(x
0(n+N
c)+x
1(n+N
c))mod 2。
Accordingly, the Gold sequence is represented as c(n)=(x 0 (n+N c )+x 1 (n+N c ))
步骤84,网络设备从所述Gold序列中截取一段子序列作为所述解调参考信号序列,截取的所述子序列的长度为D,D为自然数。Step 84: The network device intercepts a sub-sequence from the Gold sequence as the demodulation reference signal sequence, and the length of the sub-sequence intercepted is D, and D is a natural number.
本实施例对截取子序列时的起始位置不进行限制。可选地,如果D的取值为144,则解调参考信号序列可以表示为r(n)=1-2*c(n),n=1,...,144。This embodiment does not limit the starting position when the subsequence is intercepted. Alternatively, if the value of D is 144, the demodulation reference signal sequence may be expressed as r(n)=1-2*c(n), n=1, . . . , 144.
步骤85,网络设备通过PBCH中的第一资源发送所述指示信息中除所述部分信息的之外的其余信息。关于步骤85的说明请参照附图3中对于步骤32的描述。Step 85: The network device sends, by using the first resource in the PBCH, the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information. For a description of
采用附图8所示的方法生成解调参考信号r(n)之后,网络设备发送解调参考信号序列的 方式与发送附图6所示的方法生成的解调参考信号类似,在这里仅作简单说明。After the demodulation reference signal r(n) is generated by the method shown in FIG. 8, the manner in which the network device transmits the demodulation reference signal sequence is similar to the demodulation reference signal generated by the method shown in FIG. 6, and is only used here. Brief description.
步骤86,网络设备将所述解调参考信号序列r(n)平均分为第一子序列和第二子序列。可选地,网络设备将长度为144的解调参考信号序列分为长度为72的第一子序列和第二子序列。Step 86: The network device divides the demodulation reference signal sequence r(n) into a first subsequence and a second subsequence. Optionally, the network device divides the demodulation reference signal sequence of length 144 into a first subsequence and a second subsequence of
步骤87,网络设备将所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列分别映射到所述第二资源的不同部分。例如将所述第一子序列映射到第一PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源中,将所述第二子序列映射到第二PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源中。Step 87: The network device maps the first subsequence and the second subsequence to different parts of the second resource, respectively. For example, the first sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol, and the second sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
步骤88,网络设备通过所述第二资源的不同部分发送所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列。例如通过第一PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源发送所述第一子序列,通过第二PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源发送所述第二子序列。Step 88: The network device sends the first subsequence and the second subsequence through different parts of the second resource. For example, the first sub-sequence is transmitted by using a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol, and the second sub-sequence is sent by a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
在本申请实施例提供的解调参考信号序列的生成方法中,网络设备利用一个尺寸较大的LFSR生成M序列,根据指示信息中的部分信息确定从M序列进行循环位移生成Gold序列时的循环移位值,从而使得根据M序列生成的Gold序列、以及从Gold序列中截取的解调参考信号序列与所述部分信息是唯一对应的。通过这种方式将部分信息以隐式的方式携带在解调参考信号序列中,而不是将指示信息全部以显示的方式通过PBCH发送,从而减少了在PBCH中传输的数据量,节约了PBCH的时频资源。In the method for generating a demodulation reference signal sequence provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device generates a M sequence by using a larger LFSR, and determines a loop when the Gold sequence is cyclically shifted to generate a Gold sequence according to part of the information in the indication information. The value is shifted such that the Gold sequence generated from the M sequence and the demodulated reference signal sequence intercepted from the Gold sequence uniquely correspond to the partial information. In this way, part of the information is carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner, instead of transmitting the indication information through the PBCH in a manner of being displayed, thereby reducing the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH and saving the PBCH. Time-frequency resources.
相应地,终端设备在检测到解调参考信号后,执行与附图8中的步骤81~步骤84相对应的过程,获得解调参考信号中携带的部分信息,例如SBTI中的2bit或3bit的内容。终端设备进一步使用解调参考信号对PBCH的第一资源中传输的信息进行解调,从解调结果中获得所述指示信息中除所述部分信息之外的其余信息。终端设备结合得到的部分信息和其余信息,进而获得完整的指示信息,如SBTI中的全部6bit内容。Correspondingly, after detecting the demodulation reference signal, the terminal device performs a process corresponding to
步骤89,终端设备获得待选序列集合,所述待选序列集合中包括多个可能的待选序列。Step 89: The terminal device obtains a candidate sequence set, where the candidate sequence set includes multiple possible candidate sequences.
可选地,待选序列集合可以是终端设备根据步骤61~步骤63所示的解调参考信号的生成规则生成的,也可以是终端设备从另一设备中获取到的。Optionally, the set of the candidate sequence may be generated by the terminal device according to the generation rule of the demodulation reference signal shown in
具体地,终端设备或另一设备生成一个待选序列的过程包括:Specifically, the process of generating a candidate sequence by the terminal device or another device includes:
根据LFSR生成至少一组输出序列,所述至少一组输出序列中的每组输出序列中包括两个输出序列;Generating at least one set of output sequences according to the LFSR, each of the at least one set of output sequences comprising two output sequences;
分别对每组所述输出序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列,从而获得至少一个Gold序列,所述循环位移的位数是根据指示信息中的部分信息对应的取值集合中的一种取值确定的;Each group of the output sequences is cyclically shifted and added to generate a Gold sequence, thereby obtaining at least one Gold sequence, and the number of bits of the cyclic shift is one of the set of values corresponding to the partial information in the indication information. The value of the species is determined;
根据所述至少一个Gold序列中的每个所述Gold序列,分别生成一个所述解调参考信号序列。And generating, according to each of the Gold sequences in the at least one Gold sequence, one of the demodulation reference signal sequences.
例如,当部分信息包含指示信息中的2bit数据时,终端设备针对SS
idx的所有可能的4种取值,采用步骤81~步骤84所示的方法生成4个待选序列。
For example, when the partial information includes the 2-bit data in the indication information, the terminal device generates four candidate sequences by using the methods shown in
步骤810,终端设备检测到网络设备发送的解调参考信号。Step 810: The terminal device detects a demodulation reference signal sent by the network device.
步骤811,终端设备从所述待选序列集合中选择出与所述解调参考信号相关性最高的一个待选序列。Step 811: The terminal device selects, from the set of candidate sequences, a candidate sequence that has the highest correlation with the demodulation reference signal.
可选地,终端设备将接收到的解调参考信号与所述待选序列集合中的每个待选序列分别进行相关性检测,确定与所示解调参考信号相关性检测峰值的最高的待选序列作为选择 出的待选序列。Optionally, the terminal device performs correlation detection on the received demodulation reference signal and each candidate sequence in the candidate sequence set, and determines a highest peak of correlation detection peak value with the demodulation reference signal shown. The sequence is selected as the selected candidate sequence.
步骤812,终端设备根据所述选择出的待选序列,确定生成所述选择出的待选序列时用以确定循环位移的位数的部分信息。Step 812: The terminal device determines, according to the selected candidate sequence, part of the information used to determine the number of bits of the cyclic shift when the selected candidate sequence is generated.
可选地,在步骤812之后,还包括:Optionally, after
步骤813,终端设备使用检测到的解调参考信号对所述网络设备通过PBCH符号映射的时频资源中的第一资源发送的信号进行解调,从而获得通过所述第一资源发送的其余信息。Step 813: The terminal device demodulates the signal sent by the first resource in the time-frequency resource of the PBCH symbol mapping by using the detected demodulation reference signal, so as to obtain the remaining information sent by the first resource. .
步骤814,终端设备对步骤812得到的部分信息和步骤813得到的其余信息进行组合,从而得到完整的指示信息。In
附图9是本申请实施例提供的另一种传输同步信号的方法的示意图。FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application.
步骤90,网络设备生成同步信号块以及用以确定所述同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序的指示信息。Step 90: The network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set.
以下步骤91~步骤93是对附图3中的步骤31进行详细说明。The following
步骤91,网络设备通过LFSR生成一组输出序列,该组输出序列中包括两个输出序列,所述输出序列的长度为I,I为自然数。Step 91: The network device generates a set of output sequences by using the LFSR, where the output sequence includes two output sequences, where the length of the output sequence is I, and I is a natural number.
LFSR的尺寸为7。相应地,LFSR直接生成的M序列长度是X,X的取值范围是7<X<2 7-1。M序列经过循环补足可以产生更长的序列。在本实施例中预先指定输出序列的长度I取值为144,则LFSR直接生成的最长的M序列长度为127,经循环补足17位后得到长度为144的输出序列。 The size of the LFSR is 7. Correspondingly, the length of the M sequence directly generated by the LFSR is X, and the value range of X is 7<X<2 7 -1. M sequences can be cycled to produce longer sequences. In this embodiment, the length I of the output sequence is pre-specified to be 144, and the longest M sequence directly generated by the LFSR is 127. After the 17 bits are complemented by the loop, an output sequence of length 144 is obtained.
LFSR分别根据两个本原多项式生成两个输出序列。The LFSR generates two output sequences based on two primitive polynomials, respectively.
第一个本原多项式是x
7+x
3+1,LFSR对应生成的第一输出序列表示为x
0(n+7)=(x
0(n+3)+x
0(n))mod 2。LFSR生成所述第一输出序列时的初始值为x
0(1)~x
0(6)=0,x
0(7)=1,n=I-7。
The first primitive polynomial is x 7 +x 3 +1, and the first output sequence generated by the LFSR is represented as x 0 (n+7)=(x 0 (n+3)+x 0 (n))
第二个本原多项式是x
7+x+1。LFSR对应生成的第二输出序列表示为x
1(n+7)=(x
1(n+1)+x
1(n))mod 2。LFSR生成所述第二输出序列时的初始值为x
1(1)~x
1(6)=0,x
1(7)=1,n=I-7。
The second primitive polynomial is x 7 +x+1. The second output sequence generated corresponding to the LFSR is represented as x 1 (n+7)=(x 1 (n+1)+x 1 (n))
步骤92,网络设备根据指示信息中的部分信息,确定循环位移的位数。Step 92: The network device determines the number of bits of the cyclic shift according to the partial information in the indication information.
网络设备有多种方式根据指示信息中的部分信息,确定循环位移的位数,例如可以根据预定的公式,确定循环位移的位数。此外,由于部分信息是2bit或3bit的数据,取值较为有限,也可以预先设定部分信息的所有可能的取值与循环位移的位数的映射关系,在确定循环位移的位数时可以根据部分信息的取值,采用查表的方式来确定循环位移的位数。总之,只要是建立部分信息与循环位移的位数的函数关系,使得根据部分信息能够得到对应的循环位移的位数即可。The network device has multiple ways to determine the number of bits of the cyclic shift according to part of the information in the indication information. For example, the number of bits of the cyclic displacement can be determined according to a predetermined formula. In addition, since the partial information is 2 bits or 3 bits of data, the value is limited, and the mapping relationship between all possible values of the partial information and the number of bits of the cyclic shift may be preset, and the number of bits of the cyclic displacement may be determined according to The value of some information is determined by means of look-up table to determine the number of bits of the cyclic displacement. In short, as long as it is a function relationship between the partial information and the number of bits of the cyclic shift, the number of bits of the corresponding cyclic shift can be obtained according to the partial information.
可选地,为了便于直观理解,本实施例在此以示例的形式,给出了几种根据指示信息中的部分信息,确定循环位移的位数的具体方式。Optionally, in order to facilitate the intuitive understanding, the present embodiment, by way of example, gives several specific ways of determining the number of bits of the cyclic displacement based on the partial information in the indication information.
示例1:根据预定的以部分信息为变量的公式,确定循环位移的位数。Example 1: Determine the number of bits of the cyclic shift based on a predetermined formula with partial information as a variable.
循环位移的位数表示为(i 1,i 2),其中 i 2=(SS idx mod 2)+(NID1 mod 112),PCID=3*NID1+NID2,其中i 1为生成Gold序列时对第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i 2为生成Gold序列时对第二输出序列进行循环位移的 位数,PCID是小区标识,SS idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示,NID1的取值范围是0,1,…335,NID2的取值范围是0,1,2。 The number of bits of the cyclic displacement is expressed as (i 1 , i 2 ), where i 2 =(SS idx mod 2)+(NID1 mod 112), PCID=3*NID1+NID2, where i 1 is the number of bits that cyclically shift the first output sequence when generating the Gold sequence, and i 2 is the generated Gold sequence The number of bits of the second output sequence cyclically shifted, the PCID is the cell identifier, SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information, the value range of NID1 is 0, 1, ... 335, and the value range of NID2 is 0. 1,2.
示例2:根据预定的映射关系,确定循环位移的位数。换句话说,循环位移的位数与部分信息具有预定的映射关系。Example 2: Determine the number of bits of the cyclic shift based on a predetermined mapping relationship. In other words, the number of bits of the cyclic shift has a predetermined mapping relationship with the partial information.
在对两个输出序列进行循环位移获得Gold序列的过程中,可以对两个输出序列分别循环位移相同的位数,也可以分别循环位移不同的位数。也可以仅对其中的任意一个输出序列进行循环位移,而不对另一输出序列进行循环位移。In the process of cyclically shifting the two output sequences to obtain the Gold sequence, the two output sequences can be cyclically shifted by the same number of bits, or different numbers of bits can be cyclically shifted. It is also possible to cyclically shift only one of the output sequences without cyclically shifting the other output sequence.
在部分信息为2bit,SS idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示的情况下,如果仅对第一输出序列进行循环位移,则部分信息,SS idx与i 1的对应关系如表1所示,其中i 1为生成Gold序列时对第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数。显然,也可以仅对第二输出序列进行循环位移,与仅对第一输出序列进行循环位移类似,在这里不再详述。 In the case where the partial information is 2 bits and SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information, if only the first output sequence is cyclically shifted, the correspondence between the partial information, SS idx and i 1 is as shown in Table 1, wherein i 1 is the number of bits that are cyclically shifted by the first output sequence when the Gold sequence is generated. Obviously, it is also possible to cyclically shift only the second output sequence, similar to cyclic shifting only for the first output sequence, and will not be described in detail herein.
表1Table 1
在部分信息为2bit,SS idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示的情况下,如果对两个输出序列进行循环位移,则部分信息,SS idx与i 1,i 2的对应关系如表2所示,其中i 1为生成Gold序列时对第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i 2为生成Gold序列时对第二输出序列进行循环位移的位数。 In the case where the partial information is 2 bits and SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information, if the two output sequences are cyclically shifted, the correspondence between the partial information, SS idx and i 1 , i 2 is as shown in Table 2. Where i 1 is the number of bits that cyclically shift the first output sequence when generating the Gold sequence, and i 2 is the number of bits that cyclically shift the second output sequence when the Gold sequence is generated.
表2Table 2
在部分信息为3bit,SS idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示的情况下,如果仅对第一输出序列进行循环位移,则部分信息,SS idx与i 1的对应关系如表3所示,其中i 1为生成Gold序列时对第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数。显然,也可以仅对第二输出序列进行循环位移,与仅对第一输出序列进行循环位移类似,在这里不再详述。 In the case where the partial information is 3 bits and SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information, if only the first output sequence is cyclically shifted, the correspondence between the partial information, SS idx and i 1 is as shown in Table 3, wherein i 1 is the number of bits that are cyclically shifted by the first output sequence when the Gold sequence is generated. Obviously, it is also possible to cyclically shift only the second output sequence, similar to cyclic shifting only for the first output sequence, and will not be described in detail herein.
表3table 3
在部分信息为3bit,SS idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示的情况下,如果对两个输出序列进行循环位移,则部分信息、SS idx与i 1,i 2的对应关系如表4所示,其中i 1为生成Gold序列时对第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i 2为生成Gold序列时对第二输出序列进行循环位移的位数。 In the case where the partial information is 3 bits and SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information, if the two output sequences are cyclically shifted, the correspondence between the partial information, SS idx and i 1 , i 2 is as shown in Table 4. Where i 1 is the number of bits that cyclically shift the first output sequence when generating the Gold sequence, and i 2 is the number of bits that cyclically shift the second output sequence when the Gold sequence is generated.
表4Table 4
步骤93,网络设备根据步骤92确定出的循环位移的位数,对上述两个输出序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列,所述Gold序列的长度为G,G为自然数,且G=I。Step 93: The network device adds cyclic shifts to the two output sequences according to the number of bits of the cyclic shift determined in
Gold序列表示为c(n)=(x
0(n+i
1)+x
1(n+i
2))mod 2。
The Gold sequence is expressed as c(n)=(x 0 (n+i 1 )+x 1 (n+i 2 ))
可选地,在本实施例中,I的取值为144。Optionally, in this embodiment, the value of I is 144.
步骤94,网络设备根据步骤93得到的Gold序列,生成一个所述解调参考信号序列,所述解调参考信号序列的长度为G。Step 94: The network device generates, according to the Gold sequence obtained in
根据Gold序列唯一的生成解调参考信号序列的方式有很多种,本实施例对此不进行限制。例如,可以用以下方式由144位的Gold序列生成144位的解调参考信号序列。There are many ways to generate a demodulation reference signal sequence according to the Gold sequence. This embodiment does not limit this. For example, a 144-bit demodulation reference signal sequence can be generated from a 144-bit Gold sequence in the following manner.
解调参考信号序列表示为r(n)=1-2*c(n)。The demodulated reference signal sequence is represented as r(n) = 1-2 * c(n).
步骤95,网络设备通过PBCH中的第一资源发送所述指示信息中除所述部分信息的之外的其余信息。关于步骤95的说明请参照附图3中对于步骤32的描述。Step 95: The network device sends, by using the first resource in the PBCH, the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information. For a description of
可选地,如果ss block中包括2个PBCH符号,那么PBCH中的第二资源可以包括不同部分,即所述2个PBCH符号中的第一PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源,以及所述2个PBCH符号中的第二PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源。网络设备根据步骤91~步骤94所示的方法获得解调参考信号序列r(n)后,还可以执行以下步骤96~步骤98发送解调参考信号序列。即步骤96~步骤98为附图3所示的流程中的步骤33的一种实施方式。Optionally, if the ss block includes 2 PBCH symbols, the second resource in the PBCH may include different parts, that is, part of the time-frequency resources corresponding to the first PBCH symbol in the 2 PBCH symbols, and the 2 Part of the time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol in the PBCH symbols. After obtaining the demodulation reference signal sequence r(n) according to the method shown in
步骤96,网络设备将所述解调参考信号序列平均分为长度相同的第一子序列和第二子序列。即网络设备将长度为144的解调参考信号序列分为长度为72的第一子序列和第二子序列。Step 96: The network device averages the demodulated reference signal sequence into a first subsequence and a second subsequence of the same length. That is, the network device divides the demodulation reference signal sequence of length 144 into a first subsequence and a second subsequence of
步骤97,网络设备将所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列分别映射到所述第二资源的不同部分。例如将所述第一子序列映射到第一PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源中,将所述第二子序列映射到第二PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源中。Step 97: The network device maps the first subsequence and the second subsequence to different parts of the second resource, respectively. For example, the first sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol, and the second sub-sequence is mapped to a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
步骤98,网络设备通过所述第二资源的不同部分发送所述第一子序列和所述第二子序列。例如通过第一PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源发送所述第一子序列,通过第二PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源发送所述第二子序列。Step 98: The network device sends the first subsequence and the second subsequence through different parts of the second resource. For example, the first sub-sequence is transmitted by using a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the first PBCH symbol, and the second sub-sequence is sent by a partial time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol.
在本申请实施例提供的解调参考信号序列的生成方法中,网络设备利用一个尺寸较小的LFSR生成输出序列,根据指示信息中的部分信息确定对输出序列进行循环位移生成Gold序列时的循环移位值,从而使得根据输出序列生成的Gold序列、以及从Gold序列中截取的解调参考信号序列与所述部分信息是唯一对应的。通过这种方式将部分信息以隐式的方式携带在解调参考信号序列中,而不是将指示信息全部以显示的方式通过PBCH发送,从而减少了在PBCH中传输的数据量,节约了PBCH的时频资源。In the method for generating a demodulation reference signal sequence provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device generates a output sequence by using a small-sized LFSR, and determines a loop when the output sequence is cyclically shifted to generate a Gold sequence according to part of the information in the indication information. The value is shifted such that the Gold sequence generated from the output sequence, and the demodulation reference signal sequence intercepted from the Gold sequence, uniquely correspond to the partial information. In this way, part of the information is carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner, instead of transmitting the indication information through the PBCH in a manner of being displayed, thereby reducing the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH and saving the PBCH. Time-frequency resources.
相应地,终端设备在检测到解调参考信号后,执行与附图9中的步骤91~步骤94相对应的过程,获得解调参考信号中携带的部分信息,例如SBTI中的2bit或3bit的内容。终端设备进一步使用解调参考信号对PBCH的第一资源中传输的信息进行解调,从解调结果中获得所述指示信息中除所述部分信息之外的其余信息。终端设备结合得到的部分信息和其余信息,进而获得完整的指示信息,如SBTI中的全部6bit内容。具体过程与附图8中的步骤89~步骤814基本类似,在这里不再重复。Correspondingly, after detecting the demodulation reference signal, the terminal device performs a process corresponding to
附图10是本申请实施例提供的另一种传输同步信号的方法的示意图。FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of another method for transmitting a synchronization signal according to an embodiment of the present application.
步骤1000,网络设备生成同步信号块以及用以确定所述同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序的指示信息。Step 1000: The network device generates a synchronization signal block and indication information for determining the order of the synchronization signal block in the associated synchronization signal pulse set.
步骤1001,网络设备通过LFSR生成两组输出序列,每组输出序列中包括两个输出序列,所述输出序列的长度为I,I为自然数。Step 1001: The network device generates two sets of output sequences through the LFSR, where each output sequence includes two output sequences, where the length of the output sequence is I, and I is a natural number.
LFSR的尺寸为6。相应地,LFSR生成的M序列的长度是X,X的取值范围是6<X<2 6-1。M序列经过循环补足可以产生更长的M序列。在本实施例中M序列的长度I取值为72。 The size of the LFSR is 6. Correspondingly, the length of the M sequence generated by the LFSR is X, and the value of X ranges from 6<X<2 6 -1. The M sequence is cyclically complemented to produce a longer M sequence. In the present embodiment, the length I of the M sequence is 72.
首先,网络设备根据两个本原多项式生成第一组输出序列:First, the network device generates a first set of output sequences based on two primitive polynomials:
第一个本原多项式是x
6+x
5+1,LFSR对应生成的第一组输出序列中第一个输出序列表示为x
0(n+6)=(x
0(n+5)+x
0(n))mod 2,所述LFSR生成所述第一输出序列时的初始值为x
0(1)~x
0(5)=0,x
0(6)=1,n=I-6。
The first primitive polynomial is x 6 +x 5 +1, and the first output sequence of the first set of output sequences generated by LFSR is represented as x 0 (n+6)=(x 0 (n+5)+x 0 (n))
第二个本原多项式是x
6+x+1,LFSR对应生成的第一组输出序列中第二输出序列表示为x
0(n+6)=(x
0(n+1)+x
0(n))mod 2,所述LFSR生成所述第一输出序列时的初始值为x
0(1)~x
0(5)=0,x
0(6)=1,n=I-6。
The second primitive polynomial is x 6 +x+1, and the second output sequence in the first set of output sequences generated by the LFSR is represented as x 0 (n+6)=(x 0 (n+1)+x 0 ( n))
同时,网络设备根据另外两个本原多项式生成第二组输出序列:At the same time, the network device generates a second set of output sequences based on two other primitive polynomials:
第三个本原多项式是x
6+x+1,LFSR对应生成的第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列表示为x
0-(n+6)=(x
0-(n+1)+x
0-(n))mod 2,所述LFSR生成所述第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列时的初始值为x
0-(1)~x
0-(5)=0,x
0-(6)=1,n=I-6。
The third primitive polynomial is x 6 +x+1, and the first output sequence in the second set of output sequences generated by the LFSR is represented as x 0- (n+6)=(x 0- (n+1)+ x 0- (n))
第三个本原多项式是x
6+x
5+x
3+x
2+1,LFSR对应生成的第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列表示为x
0-(n+6)=(x
0-(n+5)+x
0-(n+3)+x
0-(n+2)+x
0-(n))mod 2,所述LFSR生成所述第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列时的初始值为x
0-(1)~x
0-(5)=0,x
0-(6)=1,n=I-6。
The third primitive polynomial is x 6 +x 5 +x 3 +x 2 +1, and the second output sequence in the second set of output sequences generated by the LFSR is represented as x 0- (n+6)=(x 0 - (n+5)+x 0- (n+3)+x 0- (n+2)+x 0- (n))
步骤1002,网络设备根据指示信息中的部分信息,确定循环位移的位数。Step 1002: The network device determines the number of bits of the cyclic shift according to the partial information in the indication information.
与附图9所示的实施例类似的,网络设备有多种方式根据指示信息中的部分信息,确定每组M序列生成Gold序列时的循环位移的位数。Similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, the network device has a plurality of ways to determine the number of bits of the cyclic shift when each group of M sequences generates a Gold sequence based on the partial information in the indication information.
可选地,为了便于直观理解,本实施例在此以示例的形式,给出了几种根据指示信息中的部分信息,确定循环位移的位数的具体方式。Optionally, in order to facilitate the intuitive understanding, the present embodiment, by way of example, gives several specific ways of determining the number of bits of the cyclic displacement based on the partial information in the indication information.
示例1:根据预定的以部分信息为变量的公式,确定循环位移的位数。Example 1: Determine the number of bits of the cyclic shift based on a predetermined formula with partial information as a variable.
所述循环位移的位数表示为(i 1,i 2)和(i 1-,i 2-),其中 i 2-=(SS idx2mod 2)+(NID1 mod 112),PCID=3*NID1+NID2, The number of bits of the cyclic shift is expressed as (i 1 , i 2 ) and (i 1- , i 2- ), wherein i 2- =(SS idx2 mod 2)+(NID1 mod 112), PCID=3*NID1+NID2,
其中i 1为生成所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第一组输出序列中的第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i 2为生成所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第一组输出序列中的第二输出序列进行循环位移的位数。 Where i 1 is a number of bits that cyclically shift the first output sequence in the first set of output sequences when the Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences is generated, and i 2 is generated to generate the first set of output sequences. The Gold sequence is the number of bits that are cyclically shifted for the second output sequence in the first set of output sequences.
其中 i 2-=(SS idx2mod 2)+(NID1 mod 112), among them i 2- =(SS idx2 mod 2)+(NID1 mod 112),
其中i 1-为生成所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i 2-为生成所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列进行循环位移的位数, Where i 1- is the number of bits that cyclically shift the first output sequence in the second set of output sequences when generating the Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences, i 2 - is to generate the second set of outputs The number of bits of the second output sequence in the second set of output sequences that are cyclically shifted when the sequence corresponds to the Gold sequence,
PCID是小区标识,SS idx=SS idx1+SS idx2,SS idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示,NID1的取值范围是0,1,…335,NID2的取值范围是0,1,2。 The PCID is the cell identifier, SS idx = SS idx1 + SS idx2 , SS idx is the decimal representation of the partial information, the value range of NID1 is 0, 1, ... 335, and the value range of NID2 is 0, 1, 2.
示例2:根据预定的映射关系,确定循环位移的位数。换句话说,循环位移的位数与部分信息具有预定的映射关系。Example 2: Determine the number of bits of the cyclic shift based on a predetermined mapping relationship. In other words, the number of bits of the cyclic shift has a predetermined mapping relationship with the partial information.
所述循环位移的位数表示为(i 1,i 2)和(i 1-,i 2-),其中i 1为生成所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第一组输出序列中的第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i 2为生成所述第一组输出序列对应Gold序列时对所述第一组输出序列中的第二输出序列进行循环位移的位数, The number of bits of the cyclic shift is expressed as (i 1 , i 2 ) and (i 1 , i 2− ), where i 1 is the first group when generating the Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences a number of bits of the first output sequence in the output sequence that are cyclically shifted, and i 2 is a number of bits that cyclically shift the second output sequence in the first set of output sequences when the first set of output sequences are corresponding to the Gold sequence ,
i 1-为生成所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第二组输出序列中的第一输出序列进行循环位移的位数,i 2-为生成所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列时对所述第二组输出序列中的第二输出序列进行循环位移的位数。 i 1 - the number of bits cyclically shifted by the first output sequence in the second set of output sequences when generating the Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences, i 2 - generating the second set of output sequences The number of bits of the second output sequence in the second set of output sequences that are cyclically shifted when the corresponding Gold sequence is present.
i 1和/或i 2的取值分别与SS idx1具有映射关系,i 1和/或i 2与SS idx1的映射关系与上述实施例中的表1~表4类似,只是将表1~表4中的SS idx替换为SS idx1。其中,SS idx=SS idx1+SS idx2,SS idx是所述部分信息的十进制表示。 The values of i 1 and/or i 2 are respectively mapped to SS idx1 , and the mapping relationship between i 1 and/or i 2 and SS idx1 is similar to Table 1 to Table 4 in the above embodiment, except that Table 1 to Table Replace SS idx in 4 with SS idx1 . Where SS idx = SS idx1 + SS idx2 , SS idx is a decimal representation of the partial information.
i 1-和/或i 2-的取值分别与SS idx2具有映射关系,i 1-和/或i 2-与SS idx2的映射关系与上述实施例中的表1~表4类似,只是将表1~表4中的SS idx替换为SS idx2。 The values of i 1- and/or i 2- have a mapping relationship with SS idx2 respectively, and the mapping relationship between i 1- and/or i 2- and SS idx2 is similar to that of Tables 1 to 4 in the above embodiment, except that The SS idx in Table 1 to Table 4 is replaced by SS idx2 .
步骤1003,网络设备对于每组输出序列,根据步骤1002确定出的循环位移的位数值,对该组输出序列中包含的两个输出序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个该组输出序列对应的Gold序列,从而得到两个Gold序列。所述Gold序列的长度为G,G为自然数,且G=I。Step 1003: The network device adds, according to the bit value of the cyclic shift determined in
所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列表示为c
1(n)=(x
0(n+i
1)+x
1(n+i
2))mod 2,
The Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences is represented as c 1 (n)=(x 0 (n+i 1 )+x 1 (n+i 2 ))
所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列表示为c
2(n)=(x
0-(n+i
1-)+x
1-(n+i
2-))mod 2。
The Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences is represented as c 2 (n)=(x 0- (n+i 1- )+x 1- (n+i 2- ))
步骤1004,网络设备根据步骤1003得到的每个Gold序列,生成一个解调参考信号序列,从而得到两个解调参考信号序列,所述解调参考信号序列的长度为G。Step 1004: The network device generates a demodulation reference signal sequence according to each Gold sequence obtained in
根据所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列表示为r 1(n)=1-2*c 1(n); Demodulating reference signal sequence generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the first set of output sequences is represented as r 1 (n)=1-2*c 1 (n);
根据所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列表示为r 2(n)=1-2*c 2(n)。 The demodulation reference signal sequence generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the second set of output sequences is represented as r 2 (n)=1-2*c 2 (n).
步骤1005,网络设备通过PBCH中的第一资源发送所述指示信息中除所述部分信息的之外的其余信息。关于步骤1005的说明请参照附图3中对于步骤32的描述。Step 1005: The network device sends, by using the first resource in the PBCH, the remaining information in the indication information except the partial information. For a description of
可选地,如果ss block中包括2个PBCH符号,那么PBCH中的第二资源可以包括不同部分,即所述2个PBCH符号中的第一PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源,以及所述2个PBCH符号中的第二PBCH符号对应的部分时频资源。网络设备根据步骤1001~步骤1004所示的方法获得解调参考信号序列r
1(n)和r
2(n)后,还可以执行以下步骤1006~步骤1007发送解调参考信号序列。即步骤1006~步骤1007为附图3所示的流程中的步骤33的一种实施方式。
Optionally, if the ss block includes 2 PBCH symbols, the second resource in the PBCH may include different parts, that is, part of the time-frequency resources corresponding to the first PBCH symbol in the 2 PBCH symbols, and the 2 Part of the time-frequency resource corresponding to the second PBCH symbol in the PBCH symbols. After the network device obtains the demodulation reference signal sequences r 1 (n) and r 2 (n) according to the methods shown in
步骤1006,网络设备将根据所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列r 1(n)、以及根据所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列r 2(n)分别映射到所述第二资源的不同部分。 Step 1006: The network device generates a demodulation reference signal sequence r 1 (n) generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the first group of output sequences, and a demodulation reference signal generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the second group of output sequences. The sequence r 2 (n) is mapped to different portions of the second resource, respectively.
步骤1007,网络设备通过所述第二资源的不同部分发送所述根据所述第一组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列和所述根据所述第二组输出序列对应的Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列。Step 1007: The network device sends, by using different parts of the second resource, the demodulation reference signal sequence generated according to the Gold sequence corresponding to the first group of output sequences, and the Gold corresponding to the second group of output sequences. A sequence of demodulated reference signal sequences.
在本申请实施例提供的解调参考信号序列的生成方法中,网络设备利用一个尺寸较小的LFSR生成两组输出序列,根据指示信息中的部分信息确定对每组输出序列进行循环位移生成Gold序列时的循环移位值,从而使得根据M序列生成的Gold序列、以及根据Gold序列生成的解调参考信号序列与所述部分信息是唯一对应的。通过这种方式将部分信息以隐式的方式携带在解调参考信号序列中,而不是将指示信息全部以显示的方式通过PBCH发送,从而减少了在PBCH中传输的数据量,节约了PBCH的时频资源。In the method for generating a demodulation reference signal sequence provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device generates a two-group output sequence by using a small-sized LFSR, and determines, according to part of the information in the indication information, cyclic shift of each output sequence to generate a Gold. The cyclic shift value at the time of sequence, such that the Gold sequence generated from the M sequence and the demodulation reference signal sequence generated from the Gold sequence uniquely correspond to the partial information. In this way, part of the information is carried in the demodulation reference signal sequence in an implicit manner, instead of transmitting the indication information through the PBCH in a manner of being displayed, thereby reducing the amount of data transmitted in the PBCH and saving the PBCH. Time-frequency resources.
相应地,终端设备在检测到解调参考信号后,执行与附图10中的步骤1001~步骤1004相对应的过程,获得解调参考信号中携带的部分信息,例如SBTI中的2bit或3bit的内容。终端设备进一步使用解调参考信号对PBCH的第一资源中传输的信息进行解调,从解调结果中获得所述指示信息中除所述部分信息之外的其余信息。终端设备结合得到的部分信息和其余信息,进而获得完整的指示信息,如SBTI中的全部6bit内容。具体过程与附图8中的步骤89~步骤814基本类似,在这里不再重复。Correspondingly, after detecting the demodulation reference signal, the terminal device performs a process corresponding to
本申请实施例还提供了一种网络设备。示例性地,该网络设备可以是基站。附图11是网络设备的结构示意图,该网络设备作为附图1中的网络设备,实现以上各实施例中的网络设备的功能。如图11所示,该网络设备包括收发器1110和处理器1120。The embodiment of the present application further provides a network device. Illustratively, the network device can be a base station. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device. The network device functions as the network device in FIG. 1 to implement the functions of the network device in the foregoing embodiments. As shown in FIG. 11, the network device includes a
可选地,收发器1110可以称为远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)、收发单元、收发机、或者收发电路等等。收发器1110可以包括至少一个天线1111和射频单元1112,收发器1110可以用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换。Alternatively, the
可选地,网络设备包括一个或多个基带单元(baseband unit,简称:BBU)1130。该基带单元1130包括处理器1120。基带单元1130主要用于进行基带处理,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等,以及对基站进行控制。收发器1110与该基带单元1130可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。Optionally, the network device includes one or more baseband units (BBUs) 1130. The
在一个示例中,基带单元1130可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网,也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网。可选地,基带单元1130还可以包括存储器1140,用以存储必要的指令和数据。处理器1120可以用于控制网络设备执行前述各方法实施例中的相应操作。In one example, the
对应前面附图5所描述的实施例,所述处理器1120,用于生成同步信号块以及用以确定所述同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序的指示信息,所述同步信号块中包括物理广播信道PBCH符号;根据线性反馈位移寄存器LFSR生成两个M序列,所述LFSR的初始 值是根据所述指示信息中的部分信息确定的;对所述两个M序列进行循环位移,生成一个Gold序列;从所述Gold序列中截取一个子序列作为解调参考信号序列,所述解调参考信号序列用于对所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中传输的信号进行解调,所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中包括第一资源和第二资源,所述第一资源是所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中用以传输主信息块MIB的时频资源,所述第二资源是所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中除所述第一资源之外的时频资源;Corresponding to the embodiment described in the foregoing FIG. 5, the
所述收发器1110,用于通过所述第一资源发送所述指示信息中除所述部分信息的之外的其余信息,以及通过所述第二资源发送所述解调参考信号序列。The
可选地,处理器1120生成解调参考信号序列的详细过程、以及收发器1110发送解调参考信号序列的详细过程,请参照前面方法实施例,尤其是附图3、附图4,附图5所示的方法实施例中的相关描述,在这里不再重复。Optionally, the
对应前面附图6、附图7所描述的实施例,所述处理器1120,用于生成同步信号块以及用以确定所述同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序的指示信息,所述同步信号块中包括物理广播信道PBCH符号;根据线性反馈位移寄存器LFSR生成两个M序列;对所述两个M序列进行循环位移,生成一个Gold序列;从所述Gold序列中截取至少一段子序列作为所述解调参考信号序列,所述子序列被截取时的起始位置是根据所述部分信息确定的,所述解调参考信号序列用于对所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中传输的信号进行解调,所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中包括第一资源和第二资源,所述第一资源是所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中用以传输主信息块MIB的时频资源,所述第二资源是所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中除所述第一资源之外的时频资源;Corresponding to the embodiment described in the foregoing FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, the
所述收发器1110,用于通过所述第一资源发送所述指示信息中除所述部分信息的之外的其余信息;通过所述第二资源发送所述解调参考信号序列。The
可选地,处理器1120生成解调参考信号序列的详细过程、以及收发器1110发送解调参考信号序列的详细过程,请参照前面方法实施例,尤其是附图3、附图4,附图6和附图7所示的方法实施例中的相关描述,在这里不再重复。Optionally, the
对应前面附图8-附图10所描述的实施例,所述处理器1120,用于生成同步信号块以及用以确定所述同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序的指示信息,所述同步信号块中包括物理广播信道PBCH符号;根据线性反馈位移寄存器LFSR生成至少一组输出序列,所述至少一组输出序列中的每组输出序列中包括两个输出序列;对每组所述输出序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个对应的Gold序列,从而获得至少一个Gold序列,所述循环位移的位数是根据所述部分信息确定的;根据所述至少一个Gold序列中的每个所述Gold序列,分别生成一个所述解调参考信号序列,所述解调参考信号序列用于对所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中传输的信号进行解调,所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中包括第一资源和第二资源,所述第一资源是所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中用以传输主信息块MIB的时频资源,所述第二资源是所述PBCH符号映射的时频资源中除所述第一资源之外的时频资源;Corresponding to the embodiment described in the foregoing FIG. 8 to FIG. 10, the
所述收发器1110,用于通过所述第一资源发送所述指示信息中除所述部分信息的之外的其余信息;通过所述第二资源发送所述解调参考信号序列。The
可选地,处理器1120生成解调参考信号序列的详细过程、以及收发器1110发送解调参考信号序列的详细过程,请参照前面方法实施例,尤其是附图3、附图4,附图8-附图 10所示的方法实施例中的相关描述,在这里不再重复。Optionally, the
本申请实施例还提供了一种网络设备,示例性地,该网络设备是基站。下面结合附图12以基站为例,对网络设备的结构和功能进行描述。附图12是网络设备的结构示意图,该网络设备作为附图1、附图2中的网络设备,具备方法实施例中网络设备的功能。如图12所示,该网络设备包括收发单元121和处理单元122。该收发单元121和该处理单元122可以是软件实现也可以是硬件实现。在硬件实现的情况下,该收发单元121可以是图11中的收发器1110,该处理单元122可以是图11中的处理器1120。The embodiment of the present application further provides a network device. Illustratively, the network device is a base station. The structure and function of the network device will be described below by taking a base station as an example in conjunction with FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device, which is a network device in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, and has the functions of the network device in the method embodiment. As shown in FIG. 12, the network device includes a
本申请实施例还提供了一种终端设备。应理解,该终端设备可以是上述各方法实施例中的UE,可以具有各方法实施例中的UE的任意功能。附图13是终端设备的结构示意图,该终端设备作为附图1中的终端设备,实现以上各实施例所示的终端设备的功能。如图13所示,该终端设备包括处理器131和收发器132。The embodiment of the present application further provides a terminal device. It should be understood that the terminal device may be the UE in the foregoing method embodiments, and may have any function of the UE in each method embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device. The terminal device functions as a terminal device in FIG. 1 to implement the functions of the terminal device shown in the foregoing embodiments. As shown in FIG. 13, the terminal device includes a
可选地,收发器132可以包括控制电路和天线,其中,控制电路可用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理,天线可用于收发射频信号。Optionally, the
可选地,该装置还可以包括终端设备的其他主要部件,例如,存储器、输入输出装置等。Optionally, the device may also include other major components of the terminal device, such as memory, input and output devices, and the like.
处理器131可用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据,例如用于支持终端设备执行前述方法实施例中的相应操作。存储器133主要用于存储软件程序和数据。当终端设备开机后,处理器131可以读取存储器中的软件程序,解释并执行软件程序的指令,处理软件程序的数据。The
对应前面附图5所描述的实施例,处理器131,用于获得待选序列集合,所述待选序列集合中包括多个待选序列,所述多个待选序列中的一个待选序列的生成过程包括:根据LFSR生成两个M序列,所述LFSR的初始值是根据指示信息中的部分信息对应的取值集合中的一种取值确定的,所述指示信息用以指示同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序;对所述两个M序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列;从所述Gold序列中截取一个子序列作为待选序列;Corresponding to the embodiment described in the foregoing FIG. 5, the
收发器132,用于检测到网络设备发送的解调参考信号;The
处理器131,还用于从所述待选序列集合中选择出与所述解调参考信号相关性最高的一个待选序列;根据所述选择出的待选序列,确定生成所述选择出的待选序列时用以确定LFSR的初始值的部分信息。The
可选地,处理器131获得待选序列集合的详细过程、以及选择出与所述解调参考信号相关性最高的一个待选序列的详细过程,请参照前面方法实施例,尤其是附图3、附图4,附图5所示的方法实施例中的相关描述,在这里不再重复。Optionally, the detailed process of the
对应前面附图6-7所描述的实施例,处理器131,用于获得待选序列集合,所述待选序列集合中包括多个待选序列,所述多个待选序列中的一个待选序列的生成过程包括:根据LFSR生成两个M序列;对所述两个M序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列;从所述Gold序列中截取至少一段子序列作为所述解调参考信号序列,所述子序列被截取时的起始位置是根据指示信息中的部分信息对应的取值集合中的一种取值确定的,所述指示信息用以指示同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序;Corresponding to the embodiment described in the foregoing FIG. 6-7, the
收发器132,用于检测到网络设备发送的解调参考信号;The
处理器131,还用于还用于从所述待选序列集合中选择出与所述解调参考信号相关性最高的一个待选序列;根据所述选择出的待选序列,确定生成所述选择出的待选序列时用以确定子序列被截取时的起始位置的部分信息。The
可选地,处理器131获得待选序列集合的详细过程、以及选择出与所述解调参考信号相关性最高的一个待选序列的详细过程,请参照前面方法实施例,尤其是附图3、附图4,附图6-7所示的方法实施例中的相关描述,在这里不再重复。Optionally, the detailed process of the
对应前面附图8-10所描述的实施例,处理器131,用于获得待选序列集合,所述待选序列集合中包括多个待选序列,所述多个待选序列中的一个待选序列的生成过程包括:根据LFSR生成两个M序列;根据LFSR生成至少一组输出序列,所述至少一组输出序列中的每组输出序列中包括两个输出序列;分别对每组所述输出序列进行循环位移后相加,生成一个Gold序列,从而获得至少一个Gold序列,所述循环位移的位数是根据指示信息中的部分信息对应的取值集合中的一种取值确定的,所述指示信息用以指示同步信号块在所属同步信号脉冲集中的排序;根据所述至少一个Gold序列中的每个所述Gold序列,分别生成一个所述解调参考信号序列Corresponding to the embodiment described in the foregoing FIG. 8-10, the
收发器132,用于检测到网络设备发送的解调参考信号;The
处理器131,还用于从所述待选序列集合中选择出与所述解调参考信号相关性最高的一个待选序列;根据所述选择出的待选序列,确定生成所述选择出的待选序列时用以确定循环位移的位数的部分信息。The
可选地,处理器131获得待选序列集合的详细过程、以及选择出与所述解调参考信号相关性最高的一个待选序列的详细过程,请参照前面方法实施例,尤其是附图3、附图4,附图8-10所示的方法实施例中的相关描述,在这里不再重复。Optionally, the detailed process of the
本申请实施例还提供了一种终端设备。应理解,该终端设备可以是上述各方法实施例中的终端设备,可以具有各方法实施例中的终端设备的任意功能。附图14是终端设备的结构示意图,该基站处理单元141和收发单元142。该处理单元141和该收发单元142可以是软件实现也可以是硬件实现。在硬件实现的情况下,该处理单元141可以是图13中的处理器131,该收发单元142可以是图13中的收发器132。The embodiment of the present application further provides a terminal device. It should be understood that the terminal device may be the terminal device in each of the foregoing method embodiments, and may have any function of the terminal device in each method embodiment. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device, which is processed by a base
本申请实施例还提供了一种通信系统,如附图1所示,该通信系统中包括网络设备和终端设备,网络设备可以是附图11或附图12所示的网络设备,终端设备可以是附图13或附图14所示的网络设备。The embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, as shown in FIG. 1, the network system includes a network device and a terminal device, and the network device may be the network device shown in FIG. 11 or FIG. It is the network device shown in Fig. 13 or Fig. 14.
本说明书中的各个实施例均采用递进的方式描述,各个实施例之间相同相似的部分互相参见即可,每个实施例重点说明的都是与其他实施例的不同之处。尤其,对于系统实施例而言,由于其基本相似于方法实施例,所以描述的比较简单,相关之处参见方法实施例的部分说明即可。The various embodiments in the specification are described in a progressive manner, and the same or similar parts between the various embodiments may be referred to each other, and each embodiment focuses on the differences from the other embodiments. In particular, for the system embodiment, since it is basically similar to the method embodiment, the description is relatively simple, and the relevant parts can be referred to the description of the method embodiment.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本发明实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算 机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘Solid State Disk(SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented in software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in accordance with embodiments of the present invention are generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium or transferred from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions can be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transfer to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer readable storage medium can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that includes one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (eg, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (SSD)).
显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本发明进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本发明的范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本发明权利要求的范围之内,则本发明也意图包括这些改动和变型在内。It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that various modifications and changes can be made in the present invention without departing from the scope of the invention. Thus, it is intended that the present invention cover the modifications and variations of the invention,
Claims (14)
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN201710687871.9 | 2017-08-11 | ||
| CN201710687871.9A CN109392080A (en) | 2017-08-11 | 2017-08-11 | The method and apparatus of synchronous signal transmission |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2019029548A1 true WO2019029548A1 (en) | 2019-02-14 |
Family
ID=65272751
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2018/099298 Ceased WO2019029548A1 (en) | 2017-08-11 | 2018-08-08 | Synchronization signal transmission method and apparatus |
Country Status (2)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| CN (1) | CN109392080A (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2019029548A1 (en) |
Families Citing this family (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN111835475B (en) * | 2019-04-19 | 2022-05-13 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving DMRS |
| EP4132132A4 (en) * | 2020-04-14 | 2023-08-09 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus for transmitting synchronization/physical broadcast channel block |
| CN113810094B (en) * | 2020-06-11 | 2022-11-25 | 华为技术有限公司 | Signal transmission method and communication device |
| WO2025112001A1 (en) * | 2023-11-30 | 2025-06-05 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Signal transmission method and apparatus, and device and medium |
| WO2025162239A1 (en) * | 2024-02-01 | 2025-08-07 | Mediatek Inc. | Methods and apparatus for synchronization signal block transmission in mobile communications |
-
2017
- 2017-08-11 CN CN201710687871.9A patent/CN109392080A/en active Pending
-
2018
- 2018-08-08 WO PCT/CN2018/099298 patent/WO2019029548A1/en not_active Ceased
Non-Patent Citations (3)
| Title |
|---|
| "NR Synchronization Signal Time Indexing", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 MEETING RANI #88 R1-1702177, 17 February 2017 (2017-02-17), XP051209336 * |
| INTEL CORPORATION: "SS Block Composition", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 MEETING RANI #88BIS R1-1704708, 7 April 2017 (2017-04-07), XP051242847 * |
| INTERDIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS: "On Synchronization Signal Block and Indica- tion", 3GPP TSG RAN WGL MEETING #88BIS R1-1705498, 7 April 2017 (2017-04-07), XP051243627 * |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| CN109392080A (en) | 2019-02-26 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US11558837B2 (en) | System and method for providing universal synchronization signals for new radio | |
| JP7467529B2 (en) | Broadcast signal transmitting method, broadcast signal receiving method, network device, and terminal device | |
| US11082935B2 (en) | Signal transmission method and apparatus | |
| JP6971321B2 (en) | Transmission method, network device, and terminal device | |
| WO2019029548A1 (en) | Synchronization signal transmission method and apparatus | |
| WO2019028793A1 (en) | Random access preamble transmitting method and device | |
| TWI746573B (en) | Method, network device, and terminal device for transmitting signals | |
| WO2019080153A1 (en) | Method and device for wireless communication | |
| CN111756501A (en) | Method and device for transmitting uplink control information | |
| US11502885B2 (en) | Base station, terminal, reception method and transmission method | |
| KR20200035132A (en) | Synchronization signal block display method and determination method, network device, and terminal device | |
| JP7306568B2 (en) | Communication method | |
| WO2019029496A1 (en) | Synchronization signal block indication and determination method, network device and terminal device | |
| WO2018171507A1 (en) | Method and device for sending and receiving preamble sequence of physical random access channel | |
| CN111181884B (en) | Reference signal transmission method and device | |
| JP7210480B2 (en) | Information transmission method and device | |
| CN111132221B (en) | Method and apparatus for transmitting reference signal | |
| WO2020043103A1 (en) | Signal sending method and device and signal receiving method and device | |
| CN110972285A (en) | Communication method and device | |
| CN109802784B (en) | PUCCH transmission method, mobile communication terminal and network side equipment | |
| US11218994B2 (en) | Method for demodulating shared reference signal, terminal device, and network device | |
| WO2025030475A1 (en) | Pscch enhancement for sidelink positioning | |
| WO2024032693A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for transmitting sounding reference signal, terminal, and network device |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 18844306 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
| 122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 18844306 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |